Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 454
1 of 454

Summary of Content for Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

2006 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4 Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................59 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................193 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................295 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................309 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................347 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................393 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................423 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ..................................................................... 437 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................441 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owners manual covers all models of the Acura RL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owners Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNERS SIGNATURE

DEALERS SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more recording devices commonly referred to as event data recorders or sensing and diagnostic modules.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2006 Acura RL. We are certain you will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the world.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

on the vehicle. preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety. how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully.

These signal words mean:

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Labels Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM

AIRBAGS

MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

POWER REAR MOONROOF SWITCH

SUNSHADE BUTTON

TILT BUTTON

HomeLink BUTTONS OnStar BUTTONS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT

1:

CEILING CONSOLE

INTERFACE DIAL

(P.61)

(P.156)

(P.148)

(P.177)

(P.265) (P.252) (P.179 )

(P.190)

(P.152)

(P.149)

(P.297) (P.299)

(P.154)

(P.11, 26)

(P.194)

(P.203)

(P.195, 203, 256)

(P.313)

(P.188)

1

2 : 3 :

Canadian models only Refer to the navigation system manual.

Your Vehicle at a Glance Y

our V

ehicle ata

G lance

5

MIRROR CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS

HORN

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) OFF SWITCH

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNAL/ FOG LIGHTS

PADDLE SHIFTERS (P.315)

(P.139)

(P.155) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS (P.143)

(P.279)

(P.230)

DISTANCE BUTTON (P.246)

(P.141)

(P.35)

(P.142) /

(P.155)

(P.234)/

(P.237)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BUTTONS

(P.71)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES SEAT HEATER AND SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS

(P.174) /

(P.175)

(P.141) (P.134)

(P.136)

(P.328)

(P.339)

MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS

TM

3

2

6

This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8 .......Your Vehicles Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13 .....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14 ............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16 5. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 17 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About .......................Your Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21 Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22 ..........Seat Belt E-pretensioners . 23

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25 Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 26 ......Airbag System Components . 26

How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 29

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32 How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 34 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 35

How the Passenger Airbag ...............Off Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General ................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be ...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a .................................Back Seat . 39

The Passengers Front Airbag .........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several ...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close ..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41 Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 42 .......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 44 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47 ..........................With a Seat Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51 ...........Protecting Larger Children . 52

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52 ..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

When Can a Larger Child Sit in .........................................Front . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger Safety D

river and

P assenger

Safety

7

Youll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

55

17

383

52

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Dont Drink and Drive

8

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment; front and rear crush zones; a collapsible steering column; and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengers cant take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in a proper position and

. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

always wear your seat belts

D river

and P

assenger Safety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(4)

(5) (7)

(7)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(8) (3)

(6)(10)

(8)

(9)

(1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt E-pretentioners

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicles built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including frontal, side, and rear impacts and rollovers.

Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision. For more information, see page .

Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. For more information, see page .

Your vehicle also has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact. For more information, see page .

32

3429

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

11

The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:

To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

They are designed to supplement the seat belts.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rear impacts, or minor frontal or side collisions.

12

The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers, and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors are closed and locked.

When the trunk is not tightly closed, the TRUNK OPEN indicator will stay on.

Your vehicle has door monitor indicators on the multi-information display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator and the message for each condition.

When one or more doors are not tightly closed, the DOOR OPEN indicator will stay on.

38 42

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

13

Adjust the drivers seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.

When both the trunk and one or more doors are not tightly closed, the DOOR & TRUNK OPEN indicator will stay on.

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

14

If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure the seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust the front seats.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page ).

151 143

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

15

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.

Adjust the drivers head restraint so the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustable head restraints adjust their restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the head restraints.

See page for how to adjust the seat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

151

152

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the Seat Belts

5.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

17

Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release buttons, and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).

Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

21

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

6.Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

RELEASE BUTTON

When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if its okay for you to drive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

19

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbag inflates.

Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers.

Two people should never use the same seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Do not put any accessories on seat belts.

Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults and Teens

20

CONTINUED

If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator stays on without flashing.

If you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals. You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page for how to properly position the belt).

All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all five seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners and, on models with ACC, seat belt e-pretensioners.

17

79

Seat Belt System Components

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

21

For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in place.

The seat belts in all positions except the drivers have an additional locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the locking mechanism will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.

To deactivate the locking mechanism, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.

The tensioners are designed to activate in any collision severe enough to cause front-airbag inflation.

The tensioners can also be activated during a collision in which the front airbags . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until they are unbuckled in the normal manner.

If the front seat belt tensioners ever activate, they must be replaced as the belts will no longer retract properly.

49

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

On model with Adaptive Cruise Control

CONTINUED

For added safety, the front seat belts are equipped with the e-pretensioners that work in combination with the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS) to maximize the restraining ability of the belts. For more information on the CMBS, see page .

To get the full benefit of the e-pretensioners, you and your front passenger must sit normally in your seats and wear your seat belts properly (see page ).

The e-pretensioners do not activate when the seat belts are not worn or when the VSA off indicator on the instrument panel is on.

If the automatic seat belt tensioners are activated by a collision, both front seat belts and all related components must be replaced (see page ). If only the e-pretensioners were activated, no components need to be replaced.

If your vehicle gets too close to the vehicle ahead of it in your lane, the drivers e-pretensioner slightly retracts the seat belt to alert the driver of the approaching vehicle. If a collision with the vehicle in front of you is likely, the e-pretensioners on both front seats retract the seat belts with enough force to properly restrain you and your front passenger. After they activate, the e-pretensioners release the seat belts.

25

17

325

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat belt E-pretensioners

D river

and P

assenger Safety

23

In addition, the front passengers e-pretensioner does not activate when the passengers airbag is automatically turned off because the weight sensor detects a child in the front passengers seat.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

24

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by the dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a lifetime warranty on seat belts for U.S. models. See your booklet for details.

379

Acura Warranty Information

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance

D river

and P

assenger Safety

25

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

On models with Adaptive Cruise Control:

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(10)

(9)

(9)

(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passengers Seat Weight Sensors (8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (9) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(1) Drivers Airbag (2) Front Passengers Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt E-pretensioners (5) Side Airbags

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page

).

Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

32

34

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

27

(12)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(11)

(13)

(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (14) Rear Safing Sensor (15) Side Curtain Airbags

(11) E-pretensioners Control Unit (12) Front Impact Sensors

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been turned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in case your vehicles electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passengers seat. These automatically turn off the passengers front airbag if they detect an infant or small child may be in the seat (see page ).

Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.

Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passengers side airbag path and automatically turn the airbag off (see page ).

A drivers seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see page

).

A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

Front seat belt e-pretensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, seat belt tensioners (see page ), or, on models with ACC, seat belt e-pretensioners (see page

).

31

22

35

35

35

35

34

23

23

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28

CONTINUED

After inflating, the front airbags will immediately deflate, so they wont interfere with the drivers visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicles rapid deceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will instantly inflate the drivers and front passengers airbags, at the time and with the force needed.

Only the drivers airbag will deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passengers airbag off (see page ).35

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

D river

and P

assenger Safety

29

Your front airbags are also dual- threshold airbags. Airbags with this feature have two deployment thresholds that depend on whether or not the occupant is wearing a seat belt.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the occupant would need extra protection.

Your front airbags are dual-stage airbags. This means they have two inflation stages that can be ignited sequentially or simultaneously, depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stages will ignite simultaneously to provide the quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage will ignite first, then the second stage will ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time with a little less force.

After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbags surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will inflate at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

latched

30

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work properly:

Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any cargo or metal objects under the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should not put their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.

The drivers advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

The passengers advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. If the sensors detect an infant or small child may be in the seat, the system will automatically turn the passengers front airbag off.

If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the drivers seating position.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

31

DRIVERS SEAT POSITION SENSOR

PASSENGERS SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, the sensors will detect rapid deceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the drivers or the passengers side airbag.

Moving the front seat forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, an indicator in the center of the dashboard will come on indicating passenger airbag OFF (see page

).

To ensure that the passengers advanced front airbag system will work properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.

If there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag will be off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator will not come on.

Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the sensors and operation of the seat.

35

380

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passengers seat.

32

There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating side airbag, your vehicle has an automatic cutoff system for the passengers side airbag.

The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbags deployment path.

Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbags deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in front, this system is designed to shut off the side airbag if a child leans into the side airbags path.

35

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

D river

and P

assenger Safety

33

In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid deceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag on the drivers or the passengers side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem

with your airbags, seat belt tensioners, or, on models with ACC, seat belt E-pretensioners.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

34

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

CONTINUED

This indicator alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect an infant or small child may be in the front passengers seat. It does mean there is a problem with the airbag.

You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

). This indicator alerts you that the

passengers side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does mean there is a problem with your side airbags.

If you see any of these indications, the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when you need them.

When you turn the ignition to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and go out (see page

). If it does not come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, you will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display. Have the system checked (see page ).

63

78

78

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works

How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works

not

not

D river

and P

assenger Safety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the drivers seat position sensor and the front passengers weight sensors to make sure they are operating properly.

If no one is riding in the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on.

Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:

Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. If a front airbag inflates, the seat belt tensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by your dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.If the indicator comes on with no

passenger in the front, or with an adult in the seat, there may be a problem with the advanced airbag system. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicator may also come on and off repeatedly if total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passenger ride properly restrained in a back seat. If the passenger must ride in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.

Airbag Service

36

Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.

This could make the drivers seat position sensor or the front passengers weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura Client Services at 800-382-2238.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.

If water or another liquid soaks into the seat- back, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety Precautions Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting your dealer.

Do not expose the front passengers seat-back to liquid.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

37

If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of the death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

(see pages ). (see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to protect child passengers.

42 5552

51

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly

38

Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.

Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passengers front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system, which can automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), please follow the guidelines below.

According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.

Children who ride in back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.

Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt. For more information, see page

.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children aged 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride. 35

52

CONTINUED

Protecting Children General Guidelines

The Passengers Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat

Infants Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag.

Small Children Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag can be hazardous.

Larger Children Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passengers front airbag.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

39

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

40

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.

Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in a back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.

Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page ).

If you are not wearing a seat belt in crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.

During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

54

151

54

17

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several Children

If a Child Requires Close Attention

Additional Safety Precautions Never hold an infant or child on your lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.

Never let two children use the same seat belt.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

41

This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page ).

Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states and Canadian provinces, and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page ).

Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch, and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat makers weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a babys head, neck, and back.

150

150

Use childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the doors.

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remote transmitters out of the reach of children.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants

Protecting Children General Guidelines, Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode.

If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.

If the passengers front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

In any situation, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position.

Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.

A child who is at least 1 year old, and who fits within the child seat makers weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a small child use the child seat as long as possible, until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbags, which can automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.

35

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers airbag can be hazardous.

44

Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the two outer seating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting a LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid, rather than a flexible, anchor (see page ).

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- compatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward- facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system.

1.

2.

47

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

45

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:

All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.

After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be rock solid. Some side-to-side

movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seats effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat makers instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rear- facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat to the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured.

The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

46

CONTINUED

To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:

Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors.

Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) at the outer rear seats.

Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

Push the rear head restraint tilt button on the ceiling console to pivot the head restraints down.

The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with LATCH

D river

and P

assenger Safety

47

LOWER ANCHORS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat makers instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, follow the child seat makers instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the strap as instructed by the child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), route the tether strap over the head restraint, making sure it is not twisted.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

21

Installing a Child Seat

48

RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

CONTINUED

When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat makers instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the drivers have a locking mechanism that must be activated to secure a child seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt

D river

and P

assenger Safety

49

To deactivate the locking mechanism and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

5.4.

Installing a Child Seat

50

A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.

After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), pivot the head restraint down (see page ) and route the tether strap over the head restraint.

Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.

1.

2.

3.

21 152

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Tether

Using the Tether Anchor

D river

and P

assenger Safety

51

COVER

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

ANCHOR

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:

Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?

Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

52

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.

Does the shoulder belt cross between the childs neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs?

Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

Some states and provinces also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend

to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster meets federal safety standards (see page ) and that you follow the booster seat makers instructions.

A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicles or boosters seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.

3.

4.

5.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

53

If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owners manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear- most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is properly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.

If the passengers front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger childs body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages and ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout a ride.

5217

Protecting Larger Children

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

54

This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.

Devices intended to improve a childs comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.

Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.

Two children should never use the same seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

55

Your vehicles exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. You should have no problem with carbon monoxide entering the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicles interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode. Select the mode. Turn the fan on high speed. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the underside.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels D

river and

P assenger

Safety

57

HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60 ............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62 .............................................Gauges . 70

...................Temperature Gauge . 70 ..................................Fuel Gauge . 70

.............Multi-Information Display . 71 Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 133 Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 134 ...................................Turn Signal . 136 ....................................Headlights . 136

................................Fog Lights . 138 Adaptive Front Lighting System

.........................................(AFS) . 139 ...............Hazard Warning Button . 141

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 141 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 142

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 143 .............................Keys and Locks . 145

......................Immobilizer System . 146 ..............................Ignition Switch . 147

....................................Door Locks . 148 ..............................................Trunk . 149

......Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

................Childproof Door Locks . 150 ...............................................Seats . 151

...........................................Mirrors . 154 Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 156 ................Keyless Access System . 159

..................................Seat Heaters . 174 Seat Heaters and Seat

.................................Ventilation . 175 ............................Power Windows . 177

.......................................Moonroof . 179 ...............................Parking Brake . 183

.........Interior Convenience Items . 184 ..................................Glove Box . 185

.....................Beverage Holders . 186 .............Console Compartment . 187

..................................Sun Visors . 188 ........Accessory Power Sockets . 188

...........................Rear Ashtrays . 189 ..................Front Door Pockets . 189

..............Power Rear Sunshade . 190

..............Integrated Sunshades . 191 ...............................Interior Lights . 192

Instruments and Controls Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

59

Control Locations

60

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS GAUGES

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON HOOD RELEASE LEVER

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

CEILING CONSOLE

HomeLink BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH POWER REAR

TILT BUTTON

SUNSHADE BUTTON

OnStar BUTTONS

MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT

(P.62) (P.70)

(P.156)

(P.148)

(P.177)

(P.265) (P.252) (P.179)

(P.190)

(P.152) (P.149)

(P.297)

(P.299)

(P.154)

(P.194)

(P.203)

(P.313)

(P.188)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument Panel Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

61

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

SH-AWD INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED POWER STEERING SYSTEM (ECPS) INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MESSAGE INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.68)

(P.62, 409)

(P.66)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.71)

(P.62, 410)

(P.62, 409)

(P.67, 320)

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) INDICATOR (P.69)

(P.66)

(P.67, 394) (P.64)

(P.21, 62)

(P.63, 321)

(P.68)

(P.35, 63)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR (P.64, 323)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) INDICATOR (P.66, 237)

(P.66) /

(P.34, 63)

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR (P.69, 139)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.339)

(P.66)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

(P.65, 339)

The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, or if a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message is on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

If you continue driving without fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes again at regular intervals, and you will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.

79

409

409

410

21

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Charging System Indicator

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

62

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the rear brakes, axles, and tires. If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a chime will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake

system. You will also see a BRAKE FLUID LOW or CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passengers side airbag has automatically shut off. You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi- information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your side airbags, passengers side airbag automatic cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners, or, on models with ACC, seat belt E-pretensioners. You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ). For more information, see page .

1.

2.

78

78 411

78 35

35 79

Instrument Panel Indicators

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the drivers door.

This indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have a properly- coded remote. If it is not a properly- coded remote, the indicator will blink and the engine will not start (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and when the ignition switch is turned to START (III). If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). For more information, see page .If you use the built-in key, this

indicator blinks several times when you turn the ignition switch from ON (II) to the ACCESSORY (I) position.

If you use the remote, this indicator blinks several times when you turn the ignition switch from ACCESSORY (I) to the LOCK (0) position.

78 323

146

Instrument Panel Indicators

Lights On Indicator Immobilizer System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

64

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator has three functions.

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. For more information, see page .

The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If the indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see page ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.

When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signals blink. All turn signals on the outside of the vehicle should flash.

It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ).

If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more information, see page .

1.

2.

3.

78

78

374

339

339

339

Instrument Panel Indicators

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

65

This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page .

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a FUEL LOW message on the multi- information display (see page ).

This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page .

This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

When you push the ACC button on the steering wheel, this indicator comes on green. You will also see ACC on the multi-information display.

If the indicator comes on orange, there is a problem with the ACC system. You will also see a CHECK ACC SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

). Take your vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

138

136

234

79

237

79

134

Instrument Panel Indicators

Fog Light Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

66

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the SH-AWD system. You will also see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

If it comes on while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. You will also see a SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display (see page

).

If the indicator blinks while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi- information display (see page ).

If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicles tires are extremely low on pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multi- information display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page .

Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires. Repair or replacement of PAX tires must be done by an Acura dealer or an authorized Michelin PAX system dealer. For more information, see page .

78

320

78 79

394

421

On models with Michelin PAX system

SH-AWD Indicator

Low Tire Pressure Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

67

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system.

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the power steering system. You will also see a CHECK POWER STEERING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine, and watch this indicator. If it does not go off or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the ECPS is turned off, which could make the vehicle harder to steer.

This indicator comes on when there is a system message in the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page ) to see the message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. You will also see a CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page

). For more information, see page .

The indicator comes on when you run the engine while the vehicle is not moving. To turn the indicator off,

restart the engine.

78 79

71

172

78

Instrument Panel Indicators

Message IndicatorElectronically Controlled Power Steering System (ECPS) Indicator Keyless Access System

Indicator

68

This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the adaptive front lighting system (AFS).

This indicator blinks when there is a problem with the AFS system; you will also see a CHECK ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, and restart the engine. If the indicator does not go off or blinks again, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It also comes on as a reminder that you have turned off

the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS).

The CMBS indicator also comes on if dirt or other debris blocks the radar sensor in the front grille. When you clean the radar sensor, the indicator should go off the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the CMBS. You will also see a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. If this happens, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have it checked. For more information, see page . When this indicator is on, the CMBS is not working.

23378

325

139

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Indicator

Security System Indicator

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

69

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This shows the temperature of the engines coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom white mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the

upper end of the white section of the gauge. If it reaches the red (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. For more information, see page

.

This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition.

406

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

70

U.S. model is shown.

TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGESPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.

You can change the display and customize your vehicle control settings by pressing the SEL/RESET or INFO buttons on the right side of the steering wheel.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the lower part of the multi-information display changes as shown in the illustration, each time you press the SEL/RESET button.

When you open the drivers door, a Welcome message is shown on the multi-information display. When you turn the ignition switch from the ON (II) position to the ACCESSORY (I) position, a Goodbye message is shown on the display.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

71

SEL RESET BUTTON

U.S. CANADA

INFO ( / ) BUTTONS

The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets to 0.0.

When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A is reset at the same time. When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can set Trip A and average fuel economy A to reset at the same time when you refuel your vehicle (see page ).96

Multi-Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

72

ODOMETER

TRIP METER

This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and Centigrade temperature in Canadian models.

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.

This shows the remaining life of the engine oil. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions. For more information, see page .

You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page ).94

349

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

73

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

U.S.

CANADA

ENGINE OIL LIFE

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the upper part of the display changes, as shown in the illustration, each time you press the

button. If you press the button, the display returns to the previous message.

Multi-Information Display

74

U.S. CANADA If ON

Press button Press button

Along with the trip meter, the trip computer calculates these values:

Range is the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles, so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

When you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.When Trip A is reset, average fuel

economy A is reset at the same time. When Trip B is reset, average fuel economy B is reset at the same time.

Instant Fuel Economy Range

Average Vehicle Speed Elapsed Time

Average Fuel Economy

To change the ELAPSED TIME RESET setting, see page .98

Trip Computer

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

75

This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel. For more information, see page .

When the tire pressure monitor is shown on the multi-information display, press the SEL/RESET button. The display changes as shown. You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page .

320

335

Multi-Information Display

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitor

76

U.S.

Canada

You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your Acuras HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.

When the engine oil life reaches 15 %, the display shows SERVICE DUE SOON and the code for the maintenance items to be performed.

Have your dealer do the indicated maintenance as soon as you see this message, and have them reset the display after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicated maintenance or do not reset the display, the message changes to SERVICE PAST DUE when the engine oil life becomes 0 percent.

To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked. Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to link your cell phone to the HFL and how to receive or make phone calls.

These messages appear on the multi- information display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

For details on engine oil life and maintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for important maintenance safety precautions.

When the engine oil life reaches 5 %, the display shows SERVICE DUE NOW along with the same maintenance items.

349

348

278

HandsFreeLink Maintenance Messages

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

77

TM

When a problem is detected with your vehicle, a message will be shown on the multi-information display. If this happens, refer to the applicable pages of this owners manual, and follow the instructions.

When there are several messages to be shown, the system switches the messages every 5 seconds. The message is shown until you push the INFO button. To see the message again, press the INFO button, 5 seconds after the display disappears.

Here is a list of messages shown on the multi-information display:

See page 63, 411

See page 411

See page 62, 409

See page 62, 410

See page 62, 409

See page 312

See page 408

See page 65, 339

See page 69, 139

See page 68

See page 67, 320

See page 34, 63

See page 312

See page 64, 323

Multi-Information Display

Message Display

78

CONTINUED

See page 13

See page 35, 63

See page 170

See page 171

See page 368

See page 250

See page 62

See page 298

See page 66

See page 349

See page 335

See page 337

See page 67, 337

See page 394

See page 394

See page 394

See page 147

See page 138

See page 172

See page 325

See page 69, 325

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

79

U.S.

Canada

See page 147

Multi-Information Display

80

With the multi-information display

and the INFO ( / ) and SEL/ RESET buttons on the right side of the steering wheel, you can customize some vehicle control settings for DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. If DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 is not displayed, customizing is not possible.

To have the drivers ID detected, make sure your remote is linked to the system (see

on page ). Then use your remote to unlock the doors (see

on page ).

To enter the customizing mode, press and hold the INFO ( / ) button for more than 3 seconds while the multi-information display is in its normal mode.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, or move the shift lever out of Park, the display will change to the normal screen.

When the multi-information display does not show the drivers ID.

The first customizing menu is: CHG SETTING (see page )

If you disconnect the battery, and then do not unlock the door.

When the keyless memory settings are off (see page ). DEFAULT ALL (see page )

You cannot customize the settings under these conditions:

To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park.

82 84

166 100

105

CONTINUED

Customized Settings

Memory Position Link

Keyless Access Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

81

Use the INFO ( / ) button on the steering wheel to select the settings and the SEL/RESET button to enter your selections.

If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on this page.

If you want to set the default setting, press the INFO ( / ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you want to change any vehicle control settings, select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

DEFAULT ALL

82

To set the default settings again, select DEFAULT ALL, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then select SET, and press the SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

83

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the initial CUSTOMIZE GROUP display.

METER SET UP

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SETUP

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

POSITION SET UP LIGHTING SET UP DOOR/WINDOW SET UP WIPER SET UP

Multi-Information Display

Customize Settings

84

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

85

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SET UP see page 86

METER SET UP see page 91

POSITION SET UP see page 100

KEYLESS ACCESS SET UP see page 105

LIGHTING SET UP see page 112

DOOR/WINDOW SET UP see page 119

WIPER SET UP see page 130

If equipped Here are the two custom settings for adaptive cruise control (ACC):

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select ACC SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the display changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Adaptive Cruise Control Setup

86

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 87

see page 89

While the multi-information display is in the ACC SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

When PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP is set to ON, one beep sounds when the ACC detects a vehicle in front of you. You also hear a beep when that vehicle goes out of the range of your vehicles radar sensor.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

87

When your choice is set, the display changes to the screen shown above for several seconds, and then goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the pre- running car detect beep setup.

To exit PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT BEEP without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

Multi-Information Display

88

While the multi-information display is in the ACC SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. The highlighted unit, mph or km/h, is the current setting. To change the setting, press the INFO ( / ) button until the unit you want is highlighted, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

To change the unit of measurement from mph to km/h, do this:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Adaptive Cruise Control Display Speed Unit

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

89

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the ACC display speed unit setup.

To exit ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

Multi-Information Display

90

CONTINUED

LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET with REFUEL

Here are the four custom settings for the meter setup:

ELAPSED TIME RESET

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Meter Setup

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

91

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 92

see page 98

see page 96

see page 94

There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the meter setup of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

Language Selection

92

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the language selection setup.

To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

All messages in the multi- information display will be shown in the language you selected.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

93

While the multi-information display is in the METER SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. The highlighted number is the current setting above or below the outside temperature. Press the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly until the number you want appears, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:

Multi-Information Display

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

94

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the adjust outside air temperature display setup.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

95

While the multi-information display is in the METER SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

To cause trip A and average fuel economy A to reset every time you refuel your vehicle, follow these instructions:

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel

96

To exit TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET with REFUEL without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the trip A and average fuel reset with refuel setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

97

While the multi-information display is in the METER SETUP of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

IGN OFF The elapsed time is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A The elapsed time is reset when the Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is reset when the Trip B is reset.

Press the SEL RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

There are three elapsed time reset choice you can make:

Multi-Information Display

Elapsed Time Reset

98

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit ELAPSED TIME RESET without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If you choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the elapsed time reset setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

99

There are two position setups you can make:

MEMORY POSITION LINK AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select POSITION SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Position Setup

100

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 101

see page 103

When Memory Position Link is set to ON, the drivers seat, the steering wheel, and the outside mirror positions move to the positions stored in memory. To cause the memory to activate, open the drivers door with the remote, or grab the door handle while carrying the remote.

To set the seat memory position, see page . For information on using the remote, see page . While the multi-information display

is in the POSITION SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

166 156

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Memory Position Link

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

101

To exit MEMORY POSITION LINK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the memory position link setup.

Multi-Information Display

102

When AUTO TILT TELESCOPIC is set to ON, the steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and release it, or when you remove the built-in key from the ignition switch.

While the multi-information display is in the POSITION SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Auto Tilt & Telescopic

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

103

To exit AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto tilt and telescopic setup.

Multi-Information Display

104

CONTINUED

DOOR UNLOCK MODE KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

There are three settings in the keyless access setup:

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

KEYLESS ACCESS Setup

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

105

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 106

see page 108

see page 110

To select whether the drivers door or all doors unlock when you open the drivers door with the remote or by grabbing the door handle (while carrying the remote), follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select DRIVER DOOR ONLY or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Door Unlock Mode

106

To exit DOOR UNLOCK MODE without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the door unlock mode setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

107

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH is set to ON, some exterior lights blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

The same exterior lights blink once when you lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor while carrying the remote.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Access Light Flash

108

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless access light flash setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

109

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is set to ON, the beeper sounds twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

When you lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor while carrying the remote, the beeper sounds once.

While the multi-information display is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Access Beep

110

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless access beep setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

111

There are three settings in the lighting setup:

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Lighting Setup

112

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 113

see page 115

see page 117

While the multi-information display is in the LIGHTNING SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they fade out (60, 30, or 15 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

The interior lights fade out when you close all doors and the trunk. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Interior Light Dimming Time

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

113

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the interior light dimming time setup.

To exit INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

Multi-Information Display

114

The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate light go off after the selected time when you close the drivers door and take the remote with you. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the LIGHTING SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select how long you want the lights to stay on before they go off (60, 30, or 15 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

115

To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the headlight auto off timer setup.

Multi-Information Display

116

MAX The headlights come on when it is bright. HIGH The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright. MID The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise. LOW The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark. MIN The headlights come on when it is dark.

While the multi-information display is in the LIGHTING SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select from five levels of sensitivity by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from following five levels:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Auto Light Sensitivity

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

117

To exit AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the headlight auto light sensitivity setup.

Multi-Information Display

118

CONTINUED

AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, and then press the SEL/ RESET button.

There are five settings to choose from in the door/window setup:

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Door/Window Setup

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

119

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 120

see page 122

see page 124

see page 126

see page 128

There are three settings you can choose from:

SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.

WITH VEH SPD The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 15 km/h).

OFF The auto door lock is deactivated all the time.

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Auto Door Lock

120

To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto door lock setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

121

There are three settings you can choose from:

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

SHIFT TO P The drivers door or all the doors, depending on the door lock mode setting ( see page ), unlock when you move the shift lever to Park.

IGN OFF The drivers door or all the doors, depending on the door lock mode setting ( see page ), unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Press the SEL RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

OFF The auto door unlock is deactivated all the time. This is the factory default setting.

124

124

Multi-Information Display

Auto Door Unlock

122

To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the auto door unlock setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

123

To select whether the drivers door unlocks or all the doors unlock when you unlock the doors with the remote, follow these instructions.

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Door Lock Mode

124

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

To exit DOOR LOCK MODE without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the door lock mode setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

125

When you press the LOCK button on the remote to lock the doors and the trunk, and then press the button again within 5 seconds, a beeper sounds once and the exterior lights blink once to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

When you press the UNLOCK button on the remote to unlock the doors, and then press the button again within 5 seconds, a beeper sounds twice and the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the doors are unlocked and the security system is turned off.

To turn this feature on or off, follow these instructions.

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

126

To exit KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the keyless lock acknowledge setup.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

127

When you unlock the doors by pressing the LOCK button on the remote or by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote, the doors relock and the security system sets within 30 seconds. To change the relock time, follow these instructions:

While the multi-information display is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select the relock time you want (90, 60, or 30 seconds) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Multi-Information Display

Security Relock Timer

128

To exit SECURITY RELOCK TIMER without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the security relock setup.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

129

While the multi-information display is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen, select WIPER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

The changeable setting under WIPER SETUP is called WIPER ACTION. To get into WIPER ACTION, do this:

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see WIPER ACTION, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Wiper Setup

Multi-Information Display

130

Press the or button. Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 131

You can select from these two settings when the wiper switch is in the INT (intermittent) position:

While the multi-information display is in the WIPER SETUP screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The screen changes as shown above. Select INTERMITTENT or WITH VEH SPD by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/ RESET button to enter your selection.

INTERMITTENT The intermittent operation varies according to the selection you make on the wiper levers intermittent control ring.

WITH VEH SPD The intermittent operation varies according to vehicle speed.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Wiper Action

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

131

To exit WIPER ACTION without changing the current setting, select EXIT by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

When your choice is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you choice is not set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If this happens, you need to repeat the wiper action setup.

Multi-Information Display

132

Canadian models only1 : 2 : Refer to the navigation system manual.

Your Vehicle at a Glance Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

133

MIRROR CONTROLS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

PADDLE SHIFTERS

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS) OFF SWITCH

DISTANCE BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

SEAT HEATER AND SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS

MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS

(P.315)

(P.339)

(P.325)

(P.139)

(P.154)

(P.143) STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS (P.230)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

(P.278) (P.246)

(P.175)

(P.174) /

(P.71)

(P.237)

(P.234)/

(P.155)

(P.142) /

(P.35)

(P.141)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BUTTONS

(P.136)

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER (P.134)(P.141)

TM

2

1

MIST OFF INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down to select a position.

The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull back and hold the wiper control lever. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete one more sweep after you release the lever.

To change the WIPER ACTION setting, see page .

The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicle speed.

If you turn it to the shortest delay, the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

When the switch on the left lever is turned to the AUTO or position, the headlight washers also work while the lever is held.

The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washers.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 131

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers

(On Canadian models) Headlight Washers

134

The windshield wiper arms have two parked positions: winter and summer. In the winter position, the arms sit slightly above the edge of the hood. This reduces the possibility of damage to the wiper arms or windshield wiper motor by a build-up of snow and ice.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice on the wiper arms will cause them to automatically park in the winter position.

Adjust the wiper arms to the winter position by holding both arms as shown in the illustration at the same time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the windshield, until it locks in the higher position.

To return to the summer position, push the same area of both arms the other direction.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Wiper Arm Positions

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

135

WIPER ARMS

Winter position

WIPER ARMS

Summer position HOLDING LOCATIONS

HOLDING LOCATIONS

Push down on the lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever, and hold it. The lever will return to center when you release it or complete a turn.

Turn signal Off Parking and indicator lights AUTO Headlights on High beams Flash high beams Fog lights off Fog lights on

The rotating switch on the left lever controls the lights. Turning this switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights. If you leave the lights on with the ignition switch released after turned to the LOCK (0) position or when the built-in key is removed from the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder chime when you open the drivers door.

When the light switch is in the or position, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position.

To switch from low beams to high beams, push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page ). Pull it back to return to low beams. To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams stay on as long as you hold the lever back.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

66

Turn Signal

Headlights High Beams

Turn Signal, Headlights

136

The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.

Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking structures.To turn on automatic lighting, turn

the light switch to AUTO at any time. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.

To change the AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY setting, see page .

Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights when it senses low ambient light.

The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you open and close the drivers door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or turn the light switch to

.

117

Headlights

AUTO

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

137

LIGHT SENSOR

Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam.

The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.

With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off.

With the headlight switch off, the high beam headlights come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.

This feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and close the drivers door.

To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting, see page .

If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

When the multi-information display shows a DRL OFF message, the daytime running lights are off. Follow the procedure in the left column to turn them on.

The automatic lighting off feature activates if you leave the headlight switch in the or position or if the lights are turned on by setting the switch in the AUTO position, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, then open and close the drivers door.

If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. With the drivers door open, you will hear a lights-on reminder chime.

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door.

115

Headlights

Fog Lights

Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting Off Feature

138

The adaptive front lighting system (AFS) helps to improve visibility during nighttime driving. The AFS controls the aiming direction and lighting distribution of the low beams according to the amount of turn applied to the steering wheel during cornering or turning. To turn the AFS on, turn the ignition to the ON (II) position, and turn the headlights on.

If the AFS indicator comes on and starts blinking while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. If the AFS indicator keeps blinking, or starts blinking again while driving after turning the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the AFS is not working properly (see page ). Have the AFS inspected by your dealer.

When the AFS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM message on the multi- information display (see page ).

Without AFS, your vehicle still has normal lighting ability to continue driving.

69

78

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

AFS Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

139

This switch is at the right side of the left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on and off. When AFS is off, the AFS indicator comes on as a reminder when you turn on the headlights.

Here are some operating characteristics of the AFS:

The system requires an initialization period. It does not begin to operate until you have driven the vehicle a short distance.

At a stop, the right headlight turns right when you turn the steering wheel to the right. But the left headlight does not turn left when you turn the steering wheel to the left. This prevents the left headlight from pointing at oncoming traffic.

AFS is turned off when the shift lever is in the R position.

The AFS works with the automatic headlight adjusting system to sense changes in vehicle height due to driving and loading conditions of passengers and luggage, and adjusts the vertical aim of the low beam headlights automatically to compensate for load.

If the headlights do not seem to be properly aimed, have the Auto Leveling system inspected by your dealer.

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

AFS Off Switch Automatic Headlight Adjusting System

140

AFS OFF SWITCH

Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel by pressing the or button. Press the button to increase the brightness and the button to decrease it. You can adjust the brightness with the headlight switch on or off.

The level of brightness is shown on the multi-information display while you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel BrightnessHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

141

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON U.S. CANADA

The rear window defogger clears fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off after 5 to 40 minutes (depending on the ambient temperature). It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch. You

have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side to side.

To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glare reduction function, set the brightness to the highest level, then press the button. You will hear a beep when it is canceled.

Rear Window Defogger

Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger

142

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

Make any steering wheel adjustment before you start driving.

Move the steering wheel in, out, up, or down by pushing and holding the adjustment switch in that direction.

Release the switch when the steering wheel reaches the desired position. Make sure the steering wheel points towards your chest, not toward your face, and that you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

CONTINUED

Steering Wheel Adjustments Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

143

Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

When you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position and release it, or remove the built-in key from the ignition switch, the steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up.

The steering wheel returns to its original position when you push the ignition switch or insert the built-in key back in the ignition switch.

Steering wheel movement is also controlled by the driving position memory system (see page ).

To change the AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC setting, see page

.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the fuse for the power tilt and telescopic steering wheel is removed, the power tilt and telescopic steering wheel system needs to be reset when you reconnect the battery or install the fuse.

Push the ignition switch for more than 1 second and release it, or insert the built-in key into the ignition switch, and remove it. The steering wheel automatically moves fully in and up to let you know the system is reset.

156

103

Steering Wheel Adjustments

144

You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries. Do not try to take them apart.

The built-in key (see page ) fits all the locks on your vehicle.

These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.

173

Keys and Locks Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

145

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on for a few seconds, then go out. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the remote or built-in key. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, release the ignition switch and push it, or remove the built-in key, and reinsert it. Then turn the switch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize your keys coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key fob) is near the ignition switch when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your remote or built-in key, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your remote or built-in key and cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, the engine will not start.

Immobilizer System

146

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III).

Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the ignition switch.

To use the built-in key, you have to remove the cover (see page ).

This is the normal ignition switch position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the ignition switch. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the ignition switch.

You can insert or remove the built-in key only in this position. To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, the shift lever must be in Park, and you must push the knob or built-in key in

slightly.

The shift lever must be in Park before you turn the ignition switch knob to the LOCK (0) position or remove the built-in key from the ignition switch.

You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, an ACCESSORY (I) POSITION message is shown on the multi- information display.

If you open the drivers door and leave the key in the ignition switch, you will hear a reminder beeper, and a message appears on the multi- information display according to the ignition switch position. When the ignition switch is in the ACC (I) position, a RETURN IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (I) POSITION message is shown on the multi- information display. When the ignition switch is LOCK (I) position, a REMOVE KEY message is shown on the multi-information display.

173

Ignition Switch

START (III)

ON (II) LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

147

IGNITION SWITCH

COVER

BUILT-IN KEY

Each door has a lock tab above the inside door handle. Pull the tab to lock the door and push it to unlock. When you pull the tab on the drivers door, all the doors lock.

To lock any door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab and close the door.

All doors can be locked from the outside by using the built-in key in the drivers door. To unlock only the drivers door, insert the built-in key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the built-in key a second time within a few seconds.

Each front door has a power door lock master switch. Either switch locks and unlocks all doors. Push the switch down to lock all doors and up to unlock them.

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.

To change the AUTO DOOR LOCK setting, see page .

When you shift to P after driving, the drivers door unlocks.

To change the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK setting, see page .

With the drivers door open and the built-in key in the ignition, both master door lock switches are disabled. They are not disabled if the drivers door is closed. Pushing the switch down on the open front passengers door will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open drivers door by pulling the lock tab rear ward with the remote inside the vehicle and closing the drivers door, all the doors will unlock.

106

120

122

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

148

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

If your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected, you can open the trunk from the rear seat by pulling the trunk release handle. Reach the handle through the trunk pass- through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page .

Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote.

Press the trunk release button on the drivers door.

You can open the trunk in any of four ways:

If the doors are locked, press the boot release button on the boot lid with the remote in keyless Access operating range.

To close the trunk, press down on the trunk lid.

If the doors are unlocked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid.

56 CONTINUED

Trunk

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

149

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position, the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, pull the lock tab up, and use the outside door handle.

As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the right corner in the trunk so the trunk can be opened from the inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever to the left.

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

For more information about child safety, see page .

To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk-release button on the drivers door, the trunk lid, and the remote. To do this, turn off the trunk main switch in the glove box, lock the glove box, and lock the trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key.

41

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks

Childproof Door LocksEmergency Trunk Opener

150

LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

RELEASE LEVER

Moves the seat forward and backward.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.

The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom. You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.

Moves the front of the seat up or down and the rear of the seat up or down. (Drivers seat only)

Raises or lowers the seat. (Drivers seat only)

Increases or decreases the lumbar support.

See pages for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.

14 17 Front Seat Power Adjustments

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

151

PASSENGERS SEATDRIVERS SEAT

See page for important safety information and a warning about how to properly position the head restraints.

16

Your vehicle has adjustable head restraints on the front seats.

The head restraints help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when you adjust them so the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height. The tilt of the front head restraints is also adjustable. You need both hands to adjust the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise it, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down. To adjust the tilt, pivot the front head restraint to the desired position.

You can raise the rear head restraints by hand.

To lower the rear head restraints for better visibility, press the rear head restraint tilt button on the ceiling console with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

Head Restraints

Seats

152

FRONT

RELEASE BUTTON

REAR

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.

Open the cover by pushing the knob and pulling the cover down. To close the cover, swing it up, and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly.

Make sure all items in the trunk and those extending through the pass- through are secured.

For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the built-in key. To lock the cover, insert the key, and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open. See on page .56

Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

153

COVER

KNOB

The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this sensing.

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

Mirrors

154

INDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

SENSOR

Move the selector switch to L (drivers side) or R (passengers side).

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.

The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.

When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns off the adjustment switch so you cant move a mirror out of position by accidentally bumping the switch.

Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page ).

Depending on the position of the selector switch, the left or right side mirror will pivot downward slightly when you shift the transmission into reverse. In the left position, the left mirror pivots. In the right position, the right mirror pivots. This gives you a better view of that side of the vehicle while parallel parking. The mirror returns to its original position when you take the transmission out of reverse. To turn this feature off, leave the switch in the center position.

3.

1.

2.

156

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters

Mirrors Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

155

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.

Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position (see page

). Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page ).

Your vehicle has a memory feature for the steering wheel, drivers seat, and outside mirror positions.

Two seat, steering wheel, and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button.

Press the MEMO button on the drivers door. You will hear a beep. The indicator in the memory buttons (1 and 2) will blink. Immediately press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator in the memory button will stay on. The current positions of the drivers seat, steering wheel, and outside mirrors are now stored.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. You cannot add a new driving position in the memory unless the ignition switch is the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.

3.

1.

2.

111

151

155

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System

156

MEMORY BUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

To select a memorized position, do this:

Press the desired memory button (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

The system will move the seat, steering wheel, and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments are complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will remain on.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park.

To change the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting, see page

.

To cancel the storing procedure after pressing the MEMO button:

Do not press a memory button within 5 seconds.

Readjust the outside mirror position.

Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that buttons memory.

All stored driving positions will be lost if your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected.

Readjust the seat or steering position.

1.

2.

101

CONTINUED

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

157

MEMORY BUTTONS

Press any button on the control panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Shift out of Park.

Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat or steering wheel.

If you select a memorized position without pushing the ignition switch knob or inserting the built-in key in the ignition switch, only the seat and outside mirrors will adjust. To get the system to also adjust the steering wheel, push and turn the ignition switch or insert the built-in key in the ignition switch. You will hear two beeps when it is complete.

You can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat, steering wheel, or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized position. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this driving position for later use, you must store it in the driving position memory.

To stop the systems automatic adjustment, do any of the following:

Driving Position Memory System

158

Your vehicle has the Keyless Access System. When you carry the remote with you, you can lock/unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk, and start the engine without using the built-in key.

The system may not work if: The battery of the remote is weak.

You carry a cell phone, a laptop computer, or other electrical device near the remote.

There is strong electrical current nearby.

The remote is covered by metal. A vehicle is being operated with a transmitter nearby. When the remote battery is dead.

Protect the remote and the built-in key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Always keep the remote and the built-in key away from any magnetic material.

You should have received a key number tag with your built-in key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

When the vehicle battery is dead.

Make sure the driver always carries the remote/built-in key set.

Do not drop the remote or the built-in key, and do not set heavy objects on them.

The built-in keys do not contain batteries.

Keep the remote and the built-in key away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

159

This remote is used to lock/unlock

the doors and unlock the trunk. When you carry the remote, you can lock/unlock the doors, unlock the trunk, and start the engine without a key.

You can lock/unlock the doors within a about 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius from the outside door handle.

The following keys come with your vehicle. Refer to page for how to separate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock the doors, glove box, trunk pass-through cover, and to start the engine (after you remove the ignition switch cover, see page ).

You can open the trunk within a about 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius

from the trunk release switch.

It is above or below the vehicle, even when it is within its operating range.

It is too close to the vehicle. The remote may not work if:

Anyone can lock/unlock a door or open the trunk if the remote is within the operating range of the door or the trunk.

173

170

Keys

Keyless Access System

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

160

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATING RANGE

KEY NUMBER TAG

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTES

The handle of each front door has a sensor. That sensor works with the remote so you can automatically unlock/lock the door(s).

If you do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock.

The unlock sensors do not operate when:

The remote is not within the operating range.

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by unlocking the doors.

When you unlock the door(s), some exterior lights blink twice and the system beeps twice.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

By default, only the drivers door unlocks when you grab its handle.

All the doors unlock when you grab the handle of the front passengers door.

When the doors are unlocked.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

If you wear a glove while grabbing a front door handle, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.

108

110

106

Unlocking the Door(s)

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

161

Each front door has a LOCK/ UNLOCK feature.

When you touch the door lock sensor of the front door by hand, all the doors and the trunk will lock.

The remote is not within the operating range.

The lock sensors do not operate if:

The built-in key is in the ignition switch.

The doors are open.

The ignition switch is not in the LOCK (0) position.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

When you lock the doors, some exterior lights blink once and the

system beeps once. When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

Before locking the doors, make sure the remote is not inside the vehicle.

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by locking the doors.

Within 2 seconds of touching the handle to lock the doors or locking the doors with remote, pull the handle to make sure the doors are actually locked. The door unlock sensors do not operate for about 2 seconds after the doors are locked.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

If you touch the door lock sensor of the front door with your hand wearing a glove, the door sensor may delay to respond or not respond by locking the doors.

108

110

Locking the Doors

Keyless Access System

162

DOOR LOCK SENSOR

Before closing the trunk, make sure the remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when the remote is in it, the system beeps, and the trunk reopens.

When you close the trunk with all doors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors with the remote, built-in key or power door lock master switch, the trunk will unlock.

Use the pull handle when you close the trunk.

If you open a door, pull its lock tab, and shut it when the remote is inside the vehicle, all the doors unlock. Make sure you carry the remote with you when you lock the doors.

Keyless Access System

Locking the TrunkDoor Lock Prevention

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

163

PULL HANDLE

The trunk cannot be locked if: The remote is too close to the trunk lid. The remote is on the interior rear panel. The remote is too close to the seatback of the rear seat or the seat cushion.

When the trunk is locked, you can open it in any of these ways:

Press the trunk button on the remote. Pull the trunk release switch when carrying the remote (the system beeps once).

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page . Press this button once to

lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

Press the trunk release button inside the vehicle.

56

Keyless Access System

Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Keyless Access Remote

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

LOCK

164

LED

UNLOCK BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

LOCK BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page

.

Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk if the built-in key is in the ignition or the ignition switch is in any position except the LOCK (0) position. You cannot open the trunk with the remote if the trunk main switch is turned off.

To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT setting, see page .

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote.

You cannot lock the doors if any door, the trunk, or the hood is not fully closed if the built-in key is in the ignition switch, or if the ignition switch is in any position except the LOCK (0) position.

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door. Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. The ceiling light (if the ceiling light switch is in the DOOR position) will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any doors within 30 seconds, the ceiling light fades out. If you relock the doors with the remote before 30 seconds have elapsed, the ceiling light will go off immediately.

If you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME, see page .

To change the DOOR LOCK MODE setting, see page .

When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

113

124

126

128

Keyless Access System

TRUNK

PANIC

UNLOCK

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

165

Here are the settings activated with the remote;

Driving position memory (see page ).

To turn off this feature, press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time. The LED in the remote will blink once. Then release the buttons. Doing this cancels the keyless memory settings for that remote and restores the default settings.

Audio system settings (see page ).

Customized settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

When you unlock the door with your remote, each remote activates the keyless memory settings related to that remote. The drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back of each remote.

Some of them keep the same settings as they were set previously.

To turn the keyless memory settings back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will blink twice to indicate the feature has been turned on.

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Navigation system preferences (see the navigation system manual).

157

81

203

202

Keyless Access System

Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter Care

166

DRIVERS ID

TM

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Replace the batteries if necessary. Battery type: CR2025

Remove the built-in key.

Remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

Replace the old batteries with new batteries. Place the batteries so the

side is facing up. Snap the two halves of the remote case back together.

Keyless Access System

Replacing the Remote Battery

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

167

The engine may not run, and some malfunctions may occur, if the remote is:

The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Also, the engine may not start if the remote is too close to the windows.

Outside the vehicle. On the dashboard. On the rear interior panel. In the glove box. In the door pockets. In the trunk, etc.

Keyless Access System

Ignition Switch Operating Range

168

Make sure you know where the remote is when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the engine without using the built-in key when the remote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remote with you.

If you lose your remote, call Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238 (U.S. models).

When you push the ignition switch, the remote and the vehicle recognize each other. After the recognition, the remote indicator flashes, and a beeper sounds once. After the beep, turn the ignition switch. When the remote is out of the operating range, the ignition switch is locked. If the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK (0) position to the ACCESSORY (I) position after

the beep, the steering wheel is locked. To unlock the steering wheel, turn it right and left while turning the ignition switch at the same time. If the remote and the vehicle do not recognize each other, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the ignition switch cover, insert the built-in key, and turn the switch (see pages and

). Before leaving the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position.

You will also see a RETURN IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION message on the multi- information display.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, put the transmission in Park, press the switch in, and turn it to the LOCK (0) position. When the transmission is not in Park, you cannot turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

If you open the drivers door with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, a beeper will sound.

147 170

CONTINUED

Ignition Switch

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

169

When you are pressing the ignition switch, or when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, the beeper sounds if you take the remote out of the vehicle and close the door.

To remove the ignition switch cover, insert the built-in key (see page ), then pull the cover out by pulling the built-in key while pushing it.

Also, if you close the door when the ignition switch is not in the LOCK (0) position and the remote is not inside the vehicle, the keyless access alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a message appears on the multi- information display, and the beeper sounds if the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

When the beeper sounds after you close the drivers door outside the vehicle, check the position of the ignition switch and the location of the remote.

If the engine is running and you remove the remote from the vehicle, it will continue to run. But once turned to the LOCK (0) position, the engine will not restart until a remote is brought back into the vehicle.

173

Keyless Access System

Beeper and MessageRemoving the Ignition Switch Cover Keyless Remote Not Detected

170

BUILT-IN KEY

IGNITION SWITCH COVER

push

pull

The batteries in the remote normally lasts about 2 years. To ensure maximum battery life, do not store the remote close to electrical devices such as computers or TVs. When the multi-information display shows KEYLESS REMOTE LOW BATTERY, replace the batteries as soon as possible (see page ).

The engine does not restart if you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position when the remote is outside the vehicle. Check where the remote is. Make sure that you carry the remote or built-in key with you when you operate the ignition switch.

When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, the multi- information display shows KEYLESS REMOTE NOT DETECTED, and the inside and outside beepers sound. The multi-information display message goes away when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle, and close the door or apply the parking brake.

The outside beeper sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position.

If the engine is running and you remove the remote from the vehicle, it will continue to run. Once turned to the LOCK (0) position, the engine will not restart until a remote is brought back into the vehicle.

If you pass the remote through an open window, the system does not respond. Also, even when the remote is inside the vehicle, the beeper may sound when the location of the remote is not detected due to surrounding conditions. It is not a failure. Make sure that you carry the remote with you.

167

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Keyless Remote Low Battery

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

171

The indicator stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

The indicator comes on for several seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM.

In this case, use the built-in key to lock/unlock the doors and start the engine.

If you lose or drop your remote, and the beeper sounds, contact Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238 (U.S. models)

Keyless Access System

Check Keyless Access System

172

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

The built-in key can be inserted into the remote. As shown above, keep inserting the built-in key until it is locked. To remove the built-in key, pull it out while you press the release button. To avoid damaging the remote and the built-in key, never pull on the built-in key unless you are pressing the release button.

The trunk and glove box cannot be opened when you turn the trunk main switch off and lock the glove box and trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key. Also, the trunk cannot be opened by using the remote.

The keyless access system uses electric current to identify the remote with the vehicle.

If you use medical equipment such as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your doctor if the electric current used by the remote will affect it.

Keyless Access System

Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

173

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

In HI, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag system. The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters. Push the top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the bottom of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters (U.S. models)

174

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

To use the heaters, press the button. The indicator next to the button will come on. There are three settings in the heaters:

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters and an air ventilation system. The passenger seat only has heaters in the seat bottom because of the side airbag system. The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters and the air ventilation system.

In LOW, the heater runs continuously.

When you press the button once, the system is set to HI. To change to the lower mode, press the button. To turn the air ventilation off, press the button until the indicators go off.

HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.

HI Three indicators on. MID Two indicators on. LO One indicator on. OFF All indicators off.

When you press the button once, the heater is set to HI. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select MID or LOW by pressing the

button. This will keep the seat warm. To shut down the heater, press the button until the indicators go off.

In HI, when the seat gets warm, the heater will change to MID after about 5 minutes.

In MID, the heater will change to LOW after about 60 minutes.

To ventilate the seat, press the button. The indicator next to the button will come on. The air ventilation system has four settings:

CONTINUED

Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models) Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

175

BUTTON

BUTTON

INDICATORS

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation:

Use the HI setting only to heat or to ventilate the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters or the seat ventilation, even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)

176

If the MAIN switch is pushed down (OFF), the passenger windows cannot be raised or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch off when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before operating any of the window switches. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it. Release the switch to stop the window.

CONTINUED

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

177

DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.

To open the window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.

To close the window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.

To open or close the window partially, push down or pull back on the window switch lightly to the first detent, and hold it. The window will stop when you release the switch.

All window switches also have the AUTO feature.

If the window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.

The indicators in the switches come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

The power windows have a key-off delay. You can still open and close the windows for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. The key-off delay cancels as soon as you open either front door. You must then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for the power windows to operate.

Auto Reverse

AUTO

Power Windows

178

You can open all of the windows and the moonroof from outside with the remote.

Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the drivers door.

To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote.

You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

Insert the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

To open:

Turn the key clockwise, then release it.

Turn the built-in key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the built-in key.

When the windows or moonroof stops before opening fully, to open the windows and moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 15 seconds).

Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. All the doors unlock, and all four windows and moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Built-in Key

Power Windows, Moonroof Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

179

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

To close: Insert the built-in key in the drivers door lock.

NOTE: If the windows and moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close the windows and moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 15 seconds).

Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before operating the moonroof switch on the ceiling console. To open the moonroof, pull back the moonroof switch. To close the moonroof, push the moonroof switch forward. Release the switch to stop the moonroof.

To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly. The moonroof opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening fully, push the switch briefly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows, Moonroof

Opening/Closing the Moonroof with the Ceiling Console Switch

180

MOONROOF SWITCH

To open or close the moonroof partially, pull back or push forward on the moonroof switch lightly to the first detent, and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.

To tilt the moonroof, push the center of the moonroof switch straight up. To stop the moonroof from tilting fully open, push the moonroof switch forward.

To close the moonroof fully, push the moonroof switch forward to the second detent, then release it. The moonroof closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing all the way, push the switch briefly.

Moonroof Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

181

Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page

for details.

The moonroof has a key-off delay. You can still open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch. The key-off delay cancels as soon as you open either front door. You must then turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position for the moonroof to operate.

If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.

179

Moonroof

Operating the Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter or the Key

Auto Reverse

182

If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.

To apply the parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down with your foot. To release the parking brake, push on the pedal again. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released with the engine running (see page ).63

Parking Brake Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

183

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is put into gear with the parking brake on.

Interior Convenience Items

184

ASHTRAY

FRONT DOOR POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

GLOVE BOX/OWNERS MANUAL TRAY

BEVERAGE HOLDER

UTILITY POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Your vehicle has an owners manual tray inside the glove box. To open the tray, push the release button up.

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the built-in key.

To close the tray, push it up.

Interior Convenience Items

Glove Box

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

185

RELEASE BUTTON

An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

For a short container, put the bottom plate down, and pull up the knob to use the separator.

For a long container, press the button in the beverage holder to raise the bottom plate. Stand the separator up.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

To use the beverage holder, push the lid.

Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

186

LID Press

BUTTON

Pull up

SEPARATOR

KNOB

BOTTOM PLATEBOTTOM PLATE

The rear beverage holder is in the rear seat armrest. Open the beverage holder by pushing the front of it.

To open the console compartment, pull up on the lever and lift the armrest.

To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the tray located in the console compartment lid. To use the tray, pull up on the lever, and lift the armrest pad.

The console compartment light is on when the light switch is in the

or position.

Console Compartment

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

187

LEVER

LEVER

You can extend the sun visor further by pulling it back.

To use a sun visor, pull it down. You can also use a sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip, and swing the sun visor toward the side window.

There are two accessory power sockets. One is located in the front of the center console. To use the power socket, push and release the lid, then push it forward until the socket comes to the proper position to use.

Do not use the sun visor extension feature over the rear view mirror.

Make sure to slide a sun visor forward to set it to the normal length before flipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.

Interior Convenience Items

Sun Visors Accessory Power Sockets

188

Small, rear ashtrays are located in the armrests of both rear doors. To open an ashtray, pivot the lid up.

The other socket is under the armrest in the console compartment storage area. To use the power socket, pull up the cover.

These sockets are intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).

They will not power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

The rear ashtray light is on when the light switch is in the or

position.

The interior of each front door has an extendable pocket for maps and other small, lightweight items. For safety, be sure both front door pockets are closed while driving.

When the light switch is in the or position, the front door

pocket light is on.

To remove an ashtray for emptying, open the lid, then carefully pull the tab inside the ashtray straight up and out of the armrest.

Interior Convenience Items

Rear Ashtrays Front Door Pockets

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

189

TAB LID

When you shift to reverse, the sunshade goes down automatically. To use it again, shift to another position, and push the button to raise it. If the sunshade stops while moving, check for and clear any obstacles, then push the button again.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, push the power sunshade button on the ceiling console to raise the rear sunshade. Push the button again to lower it.

Power Rear Sunshade

Interior Convenience Items

190

POWER REAR SUNSHADE BUTTON

Each rear door has an integrated sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold the tab on the top, insert the sunshade into the holder, and pull the sunshade all the way up. Insert the holes on the sunshade into the hooks on the window frame.

To prevent the integrated sunshades from being unhooked due to winds, leave the rear windows closed while driving.

The hooks are intended for use only by the sunshades. Do not hang any other items on the hooks, as that could interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Integrated Sunshades

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

191

TAB

HOLE

HOOK HOLDER

After pushing the DOOR button, all the lights come on when you open any door, unlock the doors with the remote or built-in key, or turn the ignition switch from the ON (II) or the ACCESSORY (I) position to the LOCK (0) position. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder.

The front and rear of the ceiling have ceiling lights.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting, see page

.

Push each ceiling light button to turn its light on and off.

Push the ON button to turn on all the ceiling lights. Push the OFF button to turn them off. 113

Ceiling Lights

Interior Lights

192

ON BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DOOR BUTTON

FRONT

REAR

CEILING LIGHT BUTTONS

CEILING LIGHT BUTTONS

The standard audio system has many features. This section de- scribes those features and how to use them.

The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.

The climate control system and the audio system have a voice control feature. Refer to the navigation system manual for more information.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.

The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your vehicle.

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate .......................................Control . 194

..............Climate Control Sensors . 202 ................................Audio System . 203

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 204 ............AM/FM Radio Reception . 208

.....................Adjusting the Sound . 210 Playing the XM Satellite

..........................................Radio . 213 .................................Playing Discs . 219

..................Protecting Your Discs . 228 ...Disc Changer Error Messages . 229

................Remote Audio Controls . 230

................Radio Theft Protection . 232 ............................Security System . 233

...............................Cruise Control . 234 ..Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . 237

HomeLink Universal ................................Transceiver . 252

......................................AcuraLink . 256 ............................................OnStar . 265

..........................HandsFreeLink . 278

Features F

eatures

193

TM

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control

194

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL BARS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

A/C BUTTON

Many climate control functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

When you unlock the doors with your remote, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the climate control settings are turned to the respective mode automatically when the ignition is turned to the ON (II) position.

The climate control system can also be operated by voice control. See the Navi section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control F

eatures

195

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

To select the desired temperature, push the temperature control bar up or down.

To set the drivers and passengers temperature separately, press the DUAL button. The indicator in the button will come on. The driver and passenger can each set the temperature to the desired setting.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display, then turn the interface knob to increase or decrease the fan speed and airflow.

To make the drivers and passengers temperature the same, push the DUAL button again. The indicator in the button goes out, and the passengers temperature is set to the drivers temperature.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display. Pushing ENTER on the interface selector turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.

Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control

196

The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.

This button turns the windshield defrost on and off.

You can select the vents air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard corner and side vents in all modes.

When you push this button, air flows from the defroster vents at the base of the windshield, and the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. When the indicator in the button is on, the passengers temperature cannot be set separately from the drivers.

This button turns the rear window defogger on and off (see page ). Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display, then push the interface selector down. Select any of the modes by turning the interface knob.

When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicles interior is sent throughout the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).

142

CONTINUED

Recirculation Button Mode ControlWindshield Defroster Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control F

eatures

197

Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents.

Air flows from the floor vents.

Airflow is divided between the floor vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield.

When is selected, you can increase or decrease the temperature of airflow from the dashboard vent for the drivers side and the passengers side without changing the temperature of airflow from the floor vent.

Push the interface selector right or left, then turn the interface knob to select the desired temperature.

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control

198

The heater uses engine coolant to warm the air. If the engine is cold, it will be several minutes before you feel warm air coming from the system.

The flow-through ventilation system draws in outside air, circulates it through the interior, then exhausts it through vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lower limit. Make sure the A/C is off. Select and fresh air mode. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display. Turn on the A/C by pushing ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A/C ON in the display. Make sure the temperature is set to maximum cool. Push the interface selector down, then select by turning the interface knob. If the outside air is humid, select recirculation mode. If the outside air is dry, select fresh air mode. Push the interface selector down, then set the fan to the desired speed by turning the interface knob.

Press the A/C button to view the climate control display. Turn the interface knob to set the fan to the desired speed. Push the interface selector down, then select and fresh air mode. Adjust the warmth of the air with the temperature control bars.

You can set the temperature for the drivers side and the passengers side separately when this button is pressed (indicator on). When the indicator in the DUAL button is off, you can adjust both sides to the same temperature with the drivers side temperature control bar.

Air conditioning places an extra load on the engine. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone, turn off the A/C until the gauge reading returns to normal.

you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning on the A/C, and setting the fan to maximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

1.

2. 3. 4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

70

If the interior is very warm,

Using the HeaterDual Button

Ventilation

Using the A/C

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control F

eatures

199

Air conditioning, as it cools, removes moisture from the air. When used in combination with the heater, it makes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all driving conditions whenever the outside temperature is above 32F (0C).

To remove fog from the inside of the windows: Select . The system

automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. Select . Set the fan and temperature controls to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Set the fan to the desired speed, or high for faster defrosting. Select . The system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. Adjust the temperature so the airflow feels warm. Select to help clear the rear window. To increase airflow to the windshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to another mode from , the A/C setting returns to the previous setting (on or off). Select A/C, then press ENTER on the interface selector to turn the A/C off if it is on.

Switch the fan on. Turn on the air conditioning. Select and fresh air mode. Adjust the temperature to your preference.

To clear the windshield faster, you can close the dashboard corner vents by rotating the wheel next to it. This sends more warm air to the windshield defroster vents. Once the windshield is clear, select the fresh air mode to avoid fogging the windows.

1. 2. 3. 4.

1.

2. 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice From the Windows

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control

200

The automatic climate control system adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the interior temperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicles interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and passenger. If the drivers side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system will adjust to a lower temperature.

Press the AUTO button. Set the desired temperature with the temperature control bars. You will see AUTO in the display if the climate mode is selected.

The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to its lower or its upper limit, the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.

When you change the fan speed, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode and starts to run at the selected speed.

You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word AUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, a lack of airflow can cause the windows to fog up. You should keep the fan on at all times so stale air and moisture do not build up in the interior and cause fogging.

1. 2.

Automatic Climate Control Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control F

eatures

201

The climate control system has two sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the top of the dashboard, and a temperature sensor is next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and Temperature Sensors

Climate Control Sensors

202

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

When you unlock the doors with your remote and turn the audio system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio preset memory (see page ), the auto select preset memory (see page ), and the volume and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

The audio system can also be operated by voice control. See the Navi section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

206

207 210

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Audio System F

eatures

203

KNOB

ENTER

SELECTOR

Playing the AM/FM Radio

204

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE BUTTONS

TUNE BUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

UPPER DISPLAY

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press the AM/FM button (AM or FM button on Canadian, Alaskan and Hawaiian models). You can also change bands by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands, STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the upper display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available.

Use the TUNE button to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the button to tune to a higher frequency, or the button to tune to a lower frequency. To tune with the interface dial, push the selector down, and turn the knob to TUNE. Then press ENTER on the selector, and turn the knob to the desired frequency. To exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER on the selector.

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: the preset buttons, and .

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the power/volume knob or the AM/FM button (AM or FM button on Canadian, Alaskan and Hawaiian models). Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob.

CONTINUED

TUNETo Play the AM/FM Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio F

eatures

205

STEREO ICON

TUNE ICON

BAND

The SEEK function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press the or SEEK button, then release it. You can also activate SEEK by pushing the interface selector to the right or left.

The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push the selector down, and then push it to the right. You will see SCAN flashing on the screen.

Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the scan button again, or push the interface selector to the right again.

Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it for more than 2 seconds.

Use the tune, seek, or scan function to tune the radio to a desired station.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store two frequencies with each preset button (icon).

4.

1.

2.

3.

To store a preset memory location:

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

Playing the AM/FM Radio

206

SCAN ICON

If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

Push the interface selector down to scroll down the screen, highlight A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see AUTO SEL on the screen, and the

system goes into scan mode for several seconds.

Press the A.SEL button. You will see AUTO SEL on the screen, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.

To turn off auto select, press ENTER on the interface selector (press the A.SEL button) again. This restores the presets you originally set.

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)

Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models

AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio F

eatures

207

AUTO SEL ICON

Those bands cover these frequen- cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radios reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.

The radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands.

How well the radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the stations transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.

A radio stations signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the stations signal.

Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

208

Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the stations transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception F

eatures

209

To adjust them, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface knob to SOUND. Then press ENTER on the selector.

Select the mode you want to adjust by pushing the interface selector up or down, or by turning the interface knob.

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADER are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the AudioPilot and Centerpoint features (when playing a CD-DA) to on or off.

Adjusting the Sound

210

SOUND ICON

To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.

To adjust the strength of the sound from the center or subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER

Adjusting the Sound F

eatures

211

To set this feature on or off, select AudioPilot, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to ON or OFF, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The ON or OFF indicator is shown on the screen.

Bose AudioPilot digital processing monitors sound within the cabin, and helps compensate for unwanted ambient noise with no perceived change in audio volume.

Bose Centerpoint signal processing processes stereo and matrix surround recordings to five independent channels, delivering a multi-channel surround sound experience, even from conventional stereo discs.

To set this feature on or off, select Centerpoint, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface knob to ON or OFF, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The ON or OFF indicator is shown on the display.

Centerpoint is only available when listening to a CD (CD-DA).

AudioPilot and Centerpoint are registered trade marks of the Bose corporation.

Adjusting the Sound

AudioPilot Centerpoint

212

NOTE:

Playing the XM Satellite Radio F

eatures

213

PRESET BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISPLAY/ MODE BUTTON

SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

CATEGORY BUTTONS

TUNE BUTTONS

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the United States, except Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trade mark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Satellite Radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.

To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position. Push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the power/volume knob.

Push the AUDIO button to display XM information on the screen.

You may experience periods when XM Satellite Radio does not transmit the artists name and or the song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.

To change categories, press the CATEGORY button, or push the interface selector left or right.

To switch between the category mode and channel mode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the mode changes. The CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is displayed inverted on the screen. To switch the mode with the interface dial, scroll down, select MODE, and press ENTER on the selector.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

MODE

214

To change channels, press the TUNE button, or scroll down with the interface selector, select TUNE, and press ENTER on the selector. Then turn the interface knob to the desired channel. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate SCAN, press the SCAN button. To scan with the interface dial, scroll down, and push interface selector to the right. You will see SCAN on the screen.

The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, push the interface selector to the right again.

CONTINUED

SCAN

Playing the XM Satellite Radio F

eatures

215

TUNE ICON

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel: Press the button or scroll up by pushing the interface selector up. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

Use the TUNE or SCAN function to tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Preset

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

216

XM BAND

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio F

eatures

217

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels. Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect satellite radio reception.

If you decide to purchase XM satellite radio service, contact XM Radio at , or at 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your

radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE knob until 0 appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audio system, and press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, category or CH will appear in the display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.

After youve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the Satellite Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Receiving XM Satellite Radio Service

218

CONTINUED

Playing Discs F

eatures

219

EJECT BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian) Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models

SKIP BUTTONS

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

DISC BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

TUNE BUTTONS

DISC BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

TUNE BUTTONS

POWER/ VOLUME KNOB

Your vehicles audio system has an in-dash disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To operate the disc changer, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these disc formats:

CD (CD-DA) CD-R/RW DVD-A DTS

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.

The changer cannot play DVD-V or DVD-R/RW formats.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.

DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

The changer can also play MP3 or WMA formats (see page ).

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.

225

Playing Discs

220

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

To load multiple discs in one operation:

With the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press and hold the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see LOAD in the upper display, then release the button. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way.

To load a single disc: Press and release the LOAD button.

NO DISC is shown on the screen for an empty position in the changer. When the green load indicator comes on and you see LOAD in the upper display, insert the disc into the slot. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way.

You can select the position to load a disc. Turn the interface knob to select the position, then press ENTER on the selector. This starts the loading sequence. If you do not select the position, the system loads the disc to the first empty position in numerical order.

If you press the LOAD button while a disc is playing, the system will stop playing that disc and start the loading sequence. It will then play the disc just loaded.

When LOAD appears in the upper display again, insert the next disc into the slot. Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. The system will then begin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before all six positions are filled, the system will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load operation, and begin playing the last disc loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Loading Discs in the Changer

Playing Discs F

eatures

221

Select the changer by pressing the DISC button. The system will begin playing the last selected disc in the disc changer. You will see the current disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press the corresponding number on the preset buttons, or turn the interface knob to highlight the desired disc, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats. When you play CD-TEXT, you will see the track name, artist name, and album name on the screen. When you play MP3/WMA discs, you will see the track name and folder name on the screen. If the disc was not recorded with this information, it will not be displayed.

Each time you press and release the button or push the interface

selector to the right, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the

button or push the interface selector to the left to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the button or push the interface selector to the left again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold the / or /

button.

You can also choose a track directly from a track list. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list screen will be shown. If there are no track names, track numbers are displayed. You will see the current track is highlighted. Turn the interface knob to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To Play a Disc

To Change Tracks

To Choose a Track

Playing Discs

222

CURRENT DISC

CURRENT TRACK

To exit the track list display, press the AUDIO button, or push the interface selector to the left. If you dont, the system advances to

the next track, plays about 10 seconds of it, and continues through the rest of the tracks the same way.

When you press and hold the SCAN button until you hear a beep or scroll down and push the interface selector to the right, the first track of the current disc plays for about 10

seconds. You will see SCAN next to DISC on the screen. To hear the rest of the disc, press the SCAN button or push the interface selector to the right again within 10 seconds.

If you dont, the system advances to the next disc, plays about 10 seconds of it, and continues through the rest of the discs the same way. When the system reaches the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays normally.

When you press the SCAN button or scroll down and push the interface selector to the left, the next track of the current track plays for about 10 seconds. You will see SCAN next to TRACK on the screen. To hear the rest of the track, press the SCAN button or push the interface selector

to the left again within 10 seconds.

Playing Discs

Track Scan

Disc Scan F eatures

223

SCAN ICON

SCAN ICON

To replay the current track continuously, use the interface selector to scroll down, select TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To replay the current disc continuously, use the interface selector to scroll down, select DISC REPEAT, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see REPEAT next to DISC on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

To play the tracks of the current disc in random order, use the interface selector to scroll down, select TRACK RANDOM, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see RANDOM next to TRACK on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the interface selector again.

Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

Playing Discs

224

REPEAT ICON REPEAT ICON RANDOM ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT ICON TRACK RANDOM ICON

Use the disc controls previously described.

Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session

Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112 /128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)

The specifications of the compatible MP3 file are:

The specifications of the compatible WMA file are: Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the power/volume knob or the ignition switch, play will continue at the same point when you turn it back on.

To take the system out of disc mode, press the AM/FM button (AM or FM button on Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models) or press the

button (U.S. models). To return to disc mode, press the DISC button.

The changer plays MP3/WMA discs in recorded order. Maximum playable file layers are 8, and total playable tracks are 255. If your disc has a complex structure, the changer takes some time to read the disc before beginning play.

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.

Compatible with variable bit rate and multi-session

To pause a disc, press the corresponding number of the current disc on the preset buttons. To play the disc again, press the preset button again.

Playing Discs

Playing a DVD-A DiscTo Pause a Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

F eatures

225

To play the tracks of the current folder in random order, use the interface selector to scroll down, select FOLDER RANDOM with the interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see FOLDER RANDOM next to the disc number on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the selector again.

To replay the current folder continuously, use the interface selector to scroll down, select FOLDER REPEAT with the interface knob, and press ENTER on the interface selector. As a reminder, you will see FOLDER REPEAT next to the disc number on the screen. To turn this feature off, highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not already highlighted), and press ENTER on the selector again.

To enter the FOLDER LIST, press ENTER on the selector, select a folder by turning the interface knob, then press ENTER on the selector. If you want to move to the parent folder, push the selector up. If there are no folder names, No Title is displayed. You will see the current folder highlighted.

Playing Discs

Folder RandomFolder Repeat

226

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

CURRENT FOLDER

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it by pressing the corresponding number on the preset button or turning the interface knob, and pressing ENTER on the interface selector. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button.

To eject one disc, press and release the eject button.

You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off:

When you press the eject button while listening to the radio, or with the audio system turned off, the disc that was last selected is ejected. After that disc is ejected, pressing the eject button again will eject the next disc in numerical order. By doing this six times, you can remove all the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc that is currently playing, press the eject button. You will see EJECT in the upper display. When you remove the disc from the slot, the system automatically enters the previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models except Alaskan and Hawaiian)]. The system also begins the load sequence so you can load another disc. If you do not load another disc, the load sequence is canceled, and the system continues playing in the previous mode.

If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds and put the disc changer in pause mode. To begin playing the disc, press the disc button.

Removing Discs from the Changer

Playing Discs F

eatures

227

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

228

Error Message Cause Solution If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, find the cause in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Disc Changer Error Messages F

eatures

229

Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.

If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous station.

If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track each time you press the top ( ) of the CH button. Press the bottom ( ) to return to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to return to the previous track. You will see the disc and track numbers in the upper display.

The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models except Alaskan and Hawaiian), or a disc (if a disc is loaded).

To search up and down from the current frequency and find a station with a strong signal, press the top ( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for 1 second.

Remote Audio Controls

Remote Audio Controls

230

MODE BUTTON

CH BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

If you are listening to XM Satellite Radio, use the CH button to change channels. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset channel. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous preset channel. To go to the next channel of the category you are listening to, press the top ( ) of the button for 1 second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1 second to go back to the previous channel.

To go to the next disc, press the top ( ) of button for 1 second. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous disc. When you play an mp3 /wma disc, press the top ( ) of the button for 1 second to go to the next folder. Press the bottom ( ) for 1 second to go back to the previous folder.

Remote Audio Controls F

eatures

231

Your vehicles audio system will disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code with the preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card that lists your audio system code number and serial number. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio systems serial number in this owners manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your dealer. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number.

If your vehicles battery is discon- nected or goes dead, or the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see in the upper display the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is located on the radio code card included in your owners manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have 10 tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, your dealer can access your code with your radios serial number. To access the serial number, turn the radio on. It

must display , then turn the radio off. Push and hold the preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then push the power/volume knob. The serial number will appear in two sets of four digits.

The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected.

Radio Theft Protection

232

The security system will not set if the hood, trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the Door and Trunk Open monitor on the instrument panel (see page ) to see if the doors and trunk are fully closed. Since it is not part of the monitor display, manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, position/side marker lights, and taillights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the radio. This alarm continues for 2 minutes, then the system resets. To reset an alarming system before the 2 minutes have elapsed, unlock either front door with the remote or the built-in key.

With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the drivers door or the emergency trunk opener.

Once the security system is set, opening any door or the hood without using the built-in key or the remote will cause it to sound. It also sounds if the radio is removed from the dashboard or the audio system wiring is cut.

The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, close the hood, and close the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors from the outside with the remote, built-in key, lock tab, or door lock switch. The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.

13

Security System F

eatures

233

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the DECEL/ SET button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL icon appears on the multi-information display to show the system is now activated.

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel comes on.

When cruise control is on while driving, the SH-AWD torque distribution monitor and the tire pressure monitor are not shown on the multi-information display.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

234

RES/ ACCEL BUTTON

DECEL/SET BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, and press the DECEL/SET button.

Press and hold the DECEL/SET button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will go out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the DECEL/ SET button.

To increase your speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, the vehicle speeds up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To slow down in very small amounts, tap the DECEL/SET button. Each time you do this, your vehicle slows down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This cancels cruise control. On models with adaptive cruise control (ACC), this also causes the cruise control icon on the multi-information display to go off and the cruise mode icon to come on. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL icon on the multi- information display will come back on.

When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control F

eatures

235

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal causes cruise control to cancel.

Even with cruise control on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:

Push the CRUISE button.

When you push the CANCEL button or tap the brake pedal, the system remembers the previously set speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. The vehicle accelerates to the same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

236

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS). For more information on the radar sensor, see page . For more information on CMBS, see page .

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) consists of a radar sensor in the front grille, the ACC buttons on the steering wheel, and the ACC functions of the multi-information display.

325 326

If equipped

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ACC Components

F eatures

237

ACC INDICATORMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

ACC BUTTON

DISTANCE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

DECEL/SET BUTTON

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows you to maintain a set speed and keep the vehicle ahead of you at a safe distance without having to use the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

When the vehicle ahead of you slows down or speeds up, ACC senses the change in distance and compensates by accelerating or braking your vehicle to reach the cruising speed you previously set. The distance between vehicles is based on your speed: the faster you go, the longer the distance will be; the slower you go, the shorter it will be.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down or speeds up suddenly, ACC alerts you by sounding a beeper and displaying a message on the multi- information display.

The ACC radar sensor in the front grille can detect and monitor the distance of a vehicle up to 328 feet (100 meters) ahead of your vehicle. For more information on the radar sensor, see page .

Do not use ACC under these conditions:

In poor visibility. In heavy traffic. When you must slow down and speed up repeatedly. On winding roads. When you enter a toll gate, interchange, service area, parking area, etc. In these areas, there is no vehicle ahead of you, but ACC would still try to accelerate to your set speed. In bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) On a slippery road (for example a road covered with ice or snow).

As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC can result in a serious accident. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.

326

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Overview

Important Safety Precautions

238

When there is no vehicle ahead within ACC range

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going slower than your set speedYour vehicle will maintain a set

cruising speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is going slower than your set speed, your vehicle will slow down to the speed of that vehicle. Your vehicle will then follow at a constant distance until the vehicle ahead changes speed again.

CONTINUED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Operating Characteristics

F eatures

239

Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi- information display to warn you.

Your vehicle follows the vehicle ahead of it, keeping a constant distance. ACC will not keep your vehicle at a constant distance if the vehicle ahead of you goes out of range of your set speed.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down and changes lanes, ACC no longer tracks it. Your vehicle will then return to your set speed.

In the case, decelerate your vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going at a steady speed

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

240

ACC does not work below 25 mph (40 km/h). It cannot bring your vehicle to a complete stop.

ACC will not sound a beeper or display a message on the multi- information display to warn you of vehicles going slower than 13 mph (20 km/h) or vehicles that are parked. In these cases, it is up to you to maintain a safe distance by using the brake pedal.

ACC may not recognize motorcycles or other small vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

ACC may react to vehicles beside you or even building beside you by momentarily applying the brakes or sounding a beeper under conditions such as a sudden curve or narrowing of the road, an abrupt movement of the steering wheel, or if you are in an unusual position within your lane.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Limitations

F eatures

241

Push the ACC button on the steering wheel. The ACC indicator on the instrument panel comes on, and ACC is shown on the multi- information display.

Accelerate to the desired speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/ SET button on the steering wheel.

If you press the DECEL/SET button when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h), you will hear three beeps. This means ACC is not activated, and you cannot set your speed.

When your speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h), ACC goes into wait mode, and ACC STANDBY is shown on the multi-information display.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Using the ACC

242

ACC BUTTON

DECEL/SET BUTTON

When the speed is set, it is shown along with a vehicle icon and distance bars on the multi- information display. Refer to page for how to set and change the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.

If you cancel ACC by pressing the CANCEL button or by tapping the brake pedal, the previously set cruising speed is shown on the multi- information display. To store this speed as your new cruising speed, press and release the RES/ACCEL button.

If you change the speed unit measurement from the factory default setting, the initial speed unit measurement is shown under the current unit.

To change the speed unit measurement from mph to km/h, see page .

246

89

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F

eatures

243

SET VEHICLE SPEED

U.S.

CANADA CANADA CANADA

U.S. U.S.

PREVIOUSLY SET SPEED SET VEHICLE DISTANCE INITIAL SPEED UNIT

The set speed can be increased using the RES/ACCEL button or the accelerator pedal.

To increase the set speed with the RES/ACCEL button, do this:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. The vehicle will accelerate. When you reach the speed you want, release the button.

To increase your speed in small

amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button repeatedly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will speed up about 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the vehicle accelerates to the set speed, the set speed on the multi- information display will flash.

If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at a slower speed than the speed you want to set, your vehicle will not accelerate; it will keep some distance between your vehicles.

To increase the set speed with the accelerator pedal, do this:

Press the accelerator pedal to increase to the speed you want, then press the DECEL/SET button. The set speed will be shown on the multi- information display. If you do not press the DECEL/SET button, your vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

The ACC beeper will not sound while you press the accelerator pedal, no matter how close you get to the vehicle ahead of you.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Increasing the Set Speed

244

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CONTINUED

The set speed can be decreased using the DECEL/SET button or the brake pedal.

To decrease the set speed with the DECEL/SET button, do this:

Press and hold the DECEL/SET button. Release the button when you reach the speed you want.

To slow down in small amounts, tap the DECEL/SET button repeatedly.

Each time you do this, your vehicle slows down about 1 mph (1 km/h).

When the system detects a vehicle ahead of you, a beeper sounds once and a solid-line vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display.

The set cruising speed will be shown on the multi-information display.

On a steep downhill, the vehicle speed may exceed the set cruising speed.

To decrease the set speed with the brake pedal, do this:

Tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle slows down to the speed you want, press the DECEL/SET button. The set speed will be shown on the multi-information display. If you use the brake pedal to decrease speed, and then press the RES/ACCEL button, your vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Decreasing the Set Speed Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You

F eatures

245

SET/DECEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

With ACC on, the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is controlled and maintained. You can change this distance to one of three ranges: long, middle, or short,

To change the range, press the DISTANCE button. Each time you press the button, the range changes from Long, to Middle, and then to Short.

The higher your vehicle speed is, the longer the distance will be set as shown below.

When that vehicle changes lanes or goes out of ACC range, a beeper sounds once. If there is no vehicle ahead of you within ACC range, a dotted-line vehicle icon will be on the multi-information display. To set the ACC beeper on or off, see page .87

Speed Vehicle Distance

Long

Middle

Short

50 mph (80 Km/h)

154 feet 47 meters 111 feet

34 meters 85 feet

26 meters

65 mph (104 Km/h)

200 feet 61 meters 173 feet

42 meters 101 feet

31 meters

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Changing Vehicle Distance

246

DISTANCE BUTTONU.S.

CANADA

Press the ACC button. The ACC indicator in the instrument panel goes off.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

If you cancel ACC by pressing the ACC button, the previously set cruising speed is erased from memory.

The distance you select is also shown on the multi-information display.

ACC is canceled whenever you do any of these actions:

When you push the CANCEL button or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC, the set cruising speed stays in memory. When you turn on ACC again, the speed is shown on the multi-information display. To return to that speed, accelerate to over 25 mph (40 km/h), then press the RES/ ACCEL button.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Canceling the ACC

F eatures

247

LONG RANGE

MIDDLE RANGE

SHORT RANGE

CANCEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ACC system. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.

The ACC system cannot be used while this indicator is on.

When ACC is automatically cancelled, the beeper sounds three times, and an ACC OFF message appears on the multi-information display for 3 seconds.

Any of these conditions may cause ACC to cancel:

The vehicle speed decreases below 22 mph (35 km/h).

Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.

When the VSA indicator comes on.

When the ABS or VSA is activated.

Abrupt steering wheel movement.

If ACC is cancelled by any these conditions, wait until the condition improves, then press the RES/ ACCEL button to restore ACC. When you do this, the vehicle will resume its set cruising speed.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position after ACC was automatically cancelled, the set speed is erased, and you must enter it again (see page ).

Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the radar sensor in the front grill gets dirty.

The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.

An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. 242

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Automatic ACC Cancellation ACC Indicator

248

ACC INDICATOR

The multi-information display shows various messages related to ACC. For a description of each ACC message you may see, refer to the chart on this and the following page.

CONTINUED

Message Description

ACC is on.

ACC is on and in standby mode.

A cruising speed can be set by pressing the DECEL/SET button.

ACC is in standby mode, and the previously set cruising speed is in memory. The previously set speed can be resumed by pressing the RES/ ACCEL button.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Messages on the Multi-Information Display

F eatures

249

U.S.

CANADA

Message MessageDescription Description

ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

You will hear a beep when the vehicle moves out of the ACC radar sensors range.

ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead of you.

You will hear a beep when ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

ACC has automatically cancelled because its radar sensor in the front grill is dirty.

You will hear three beeps.

ACC has automatically cancelled because of bad weather or other conditions.

You will hear three beeps.

Apply the brakes immediately. Your vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead of it.

You will hear a continuous beep.

ACC needs to be checked.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

250

U.S.

U.S.

CANADA

CANADA

To switch from ACC to cruise control, press the distance button on the steering wheel, and hold it for 1 second.

Always be aware which mode is selected.

When the cruise control is selected, ACC does not sound a beeper or display a message on the multi- information display. Make sure to keep a safe distance from the vehicle ahead of you.

When you press the button, you will see CRUISE MODE SELECTED on the multi-information display for 2 seconds. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the distance button again for 1 second.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Switching to Cruise Control

F eatures

251

DISTANCE BUTTON

Press the distance button.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes. Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.

If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button.

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door opener motor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage door opener remote 2 to 5 inches from HomeLink. Make sure you are not blocking your view of the red indicator in HomeLink.

The HomeLink universal transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remotely controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

If you are training HomeLink to operate a garage door or gate, you should unplug the motor for that device during training. Repeatedly pressing the remote control button could burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in a permanent memory. There should be no need to retrain HomeLink if your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected. If your garage door opener was manufactured before April 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it. They do not have the safety feature that causes the motor to stop and

reverse if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury.

Always refer to the opening instructions and safety information that came with your garage door opener or other equipment you intend to operate with HomeLink. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment.

For quick and accurate training, make sure the remote control transmitter for the device (garage door, automatic gate, security system, etc.) has a fresh battery.

1.

2.

Training HomeLink

General Information

Important Safety Precautions

Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

252

Plug in the garage door opener motor, then test the HomeLink button by pushing it for about 1

second. If the button works, programming is complete. If the button does not work go to step 6.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the HomeLink buttons at the same time.

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not flash rapidly), your remote transmitter may stop transmitting after a short time. Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remote transmitter button and one of the HomeLink buttons at the same time. While continuing to hold the HomeLink button, press and release the remote transmitter button every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLink begins to flash slowly at first, then rapidly, release both buttons, and go to step 5. If the red indicator in HomeLink continues to flash slowly (does not begin to flash rapidly), repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train the other two HomeLink buttons to operate any other compatible remotely controlled devices around your home (lighting, automatic gate, security system, etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidly for 2 seconds then stays on, you have a rolling code transmitter: go to Training with a Rolling Code System (see page ).

If the indicator stays on or flashes slowly, repeat steps 2 thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLink button for a few seconds, then watch the red indicator on HomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

254

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

253

RED INDICATOR

For security purposes, newer garage door opening systems use a rolling or variable code. Information from the remote control and the garage door opener are needed before HomeLink can operate the garage door opener.

Find the training button on your garage door opener unit. The location will vary, depending on the manufacturer.

Make sure you have properly completed the Training HomeLink procedure.

Press the HomeLink button again. It should operate the garage door.

The Training HomeLink procedure trains HomeLink to the proper garage door opener code. The following procedure synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener so it sends and receives the correct codes.

Press the training button on the garage door opener unit until the indicator next to the button comes on. The indicator may blink, or come on and stay on. You then have approximately 30 seconds to complete the following steps.

Press and hold the button on HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLink button again for 3 to 4 seconds. This should turn off the training indicator on the garage door opener unit. (Some systems may require you to press the button up to three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling Code System

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

254

TRAINING BUTTON

You should erase all three codes before selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all three buttons, press and hold the two outside buttons until the red indicator begins to flash, then release the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter was programmed, the indicator will stay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with training the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, or would like information on home products that can be operated by HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly, continue to hold the HomeLink button, and follow steps 3 thru 6 under Training HomeLink (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter was previously programmed, the indicator will flash rapidly for 2 seconds, and then stay on for about 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLink button to be trained until the HomeLink indicator begins to flash slowly.

1.

2.

252

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button Customer Assistance

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

255

Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server. Working through the XM radio satellite, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information on your vehicles features.

Important recall and safety information.

Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.

U.S. models except Alaskan and Hawaiian

Interface Dial

AcuraLink

256

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

If you have a new message, an envelope icon appears in the top right corner of the navigation screen.

To open a message:

Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Message from the navigation system map menu. If there is more than one new message, you will see a list of message titles.

Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.

Only diagnostic info messages appear while driving. They indicate if your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page ).

After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately. Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.

Select Message to display the Select a message category screen. Then, select ALL MESSAGES.

Scroll up or down, and select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

To view previously read messages, press the INFO button, then select MESSAGES.

263

Reading Messages

AcuraLink F

eatures

257

NOTE:

Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer.

To delete a single message: Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to Delete with the interface knob, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that button will not be highlighted.

Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages button, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select MORE by pushing the interface selector to the right.

Press the SETUP button to view the setup screen.

The Delete All Messages command only works for quick tip and maintenance minder messages. Other messages must be deleted individually.

To delete all messages:

AcuraLink

Deleting Messages Message Options

258

NOTE: NOTE:

To set your AcuraLink preferences (the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the Owner Link website at www.owners.acura.com, and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.

Select this button to delete the current message.

Select this button to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice button, it changes to a Stop Reading button. Select the button again to stop the voice.

Select this button to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select , the HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you. To make a call, your Bluetooth compatible phone must be paired to your vehicles HandsFreeLink (see page ).

Select this button to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.

Select this button to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from. AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If you visit another dealer for service two times within a 14-month period, AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.

Select this button to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cell phone must be linked to the HFL and have a compatible data service available. Access the Owner Link website to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.278

AcuraLink

Message PreferencesDelete

Voice

Call

Call

Find Nearest Acura Dealer

Call Your Acura Dealer

More Info

F eatures

259

Select this button to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.

Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice button when you want a message read to you.

To access the following functions, press the SETUP button, push the interface dial to the right to select MORE, then rotate the interface dial to select AcuraLink/Messages.

Select this button to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall or problem is done or corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.

Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen). Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the navigation screen).

For the Phone Data Connection button to be active, you need a Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phone paired to the HandsFreeLink (HFL), and a compatible data service (see

on page ).283

AcuraLink

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Phone-Data Connection

Auto Reading

Delete Messages

New Message Notification

Pairing Your Phone

260

NOTE:

During the first 90 days of ownership, one of 32 different messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the technological features of your vehicle.

These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other RL owners, supplement your Owners Manual and Quick Start Guide. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura Client Services directly through the HFL.

There are six message categories in AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature Guides, Maintenance Minders, Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Dealer Appointment Reminders. The system can store up to 256 messages.

Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.

AcuraLink

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

F eatures

261

If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it. If you dont get your vehicle fixed, you will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items also appears in an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.

AcuraLink

Recall/CampaignsMaintenance Minder

262

Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait a while.

You will see information from the onboard troubleshooting database.

You can then use message options to call your dealer for an appointment, find the nearest dealer, or find out more information about the issue.

When an instrument panel indicator comes on, AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, Check more information. If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option. If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)

If an instrument panel indicator stays on when it should go off, or a message appears on the multi- information display, AcuraLink can identify the problem, send the information to Acura for analysis, and then provide you with the most accurate repair information available all before going to a dealer. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.

A diagnostic message is generated if any of the instrument panel indicators stay on when they should go off. For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page

.

The AcuraLink system cannot determine some mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.

61 CONTINUED

AcuraLink

Diagnostic Info

F eatures

263

When you make an appointment through the Owners Link Online Scheduling Service, you can be reminded about that appointment through the AcuraLink two days in advance. If you need to reschedule, you can call your dealer directly with the HFL.

The timing of your reminder is based on your reminder preference established on Owner Link.

When you select the More Info option, if the HFL is connected to a cellular data service, AcuraLink gathers more information about the problem, and sends it to Acura. There, the information is analyzed and returned to the vehicle with the most accurate repair information.

AcuraLink

Dealer Appointment Reminder

264

U.S. models only The OnStar system in your vehicle gives you access to a wide range of services and information with the touch of a button. An OnStar advisor is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

The Safe and Sound Plan provides these features:

Roadside Assistance Emergency Services Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Accident Assistance Remote Door Locking/Unlocking Stolen Vehicle Tracking Misplaced Vehicle Assistance Online Concierge Services

The Directions and Connections Plan provides these additional features:

Route Support Ride Assist Information and Convenience Services

The OnStar buttons and indicator are located on the ceiling near the front ceiling light.

OnStar

OnStar Control Panel

F eatures

265

VOICE ACTIVATED KEY PAD BUTTON

SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR

EMERGENCY BUTTON

OnStar SERVICES BUTTON

CALL ANSWER/ CALL END (WHITE PHONE) BUTTON

To record a message:

A microphone is located in the base of the OnStar control panel so you can speak to the advisor without taking your hands off the steering wheel or diverting your attention from the road. The OnStar advisors voice comes from the audio systems speakers. Use the volume control on the audio system or on the steering wheel to adjust the volume.

Depending on which service you request, you may need to give your Personal Identification Number (PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a number you make up and provide when you establish your OnStar service.

If cellular telephone service is not available in the area you are driving in, you will hear a fast busy signal. The system will retry the connection several times before returning to the ready mode.

Press this button to contact an OnStar advisor. You will hear a chime, followed by the announcement, Connecting to OnStar. The connection should take about 15 seconds. The advisor will assist you with any of the services included in your plan.

To cancel the retry, press the white phone button. During your call to the advisor or

virtual advisor, press and release the OnStar button. The system beeps to indicate that it is recording. When you are finished recording, press and release the OnStar button again. The system beeps and stops recording.

When you are finished listening, press the white phone button. The system responds with Goodbye.

Say Advisor playback. The recorded message is played through the audio system speakers.

Press the white phone button. The system responds with OnStar ready.

To hear the first playback of a message:

You can record up to 5 minutes of information from your OnStar Advisor or the virtual advisor. This is helpful for reviewing the route, hotel, or restaurant information you receive from the OnStar center.

OnStar

OnStar Services Button

Recording an Advisor or Virtual Advisor Message

266

Press this button to send dial tones while communicating with an automated phone system during an OnStar personal call (see page ).

The advisor will ask about the nature of the emergency, locate your vehicle, and notify the appropriate emergency service agencies.

If you press this button accidentally, do not cancel the call. Wait until the OnStar advisor answers, then explain your mistake.

Say Advisor playback. The system responds with Play or Resume. If you say Play, the message plays from the beginning. If you say Resume, the message plays from the point you previously stopped it.

To hear a message again:

Press this button to contact an OnStar advisor only if you have an emergency situation. You will hear a tone, followed by the announcement, Connecting to OnStar Emergency. Your call is given highest priority.

Press the white phone button. The system responds with OnStar ready.

Recording a new message will delete the previous message.

Press this white phone button to end a call to the OnStar advisor. If the OnStar center calls you, press this button to answer the call.

This button is also used to initiate the Personal Calling and Virtual Advisor services, if you have subscribed.

270

OnStar

Emergency Button

Voice Activated Keypad Button

Call Answer/Call End Button

F eatures

267

If you are ever in an accident that causes the airbags to deploy, the OnStar system automatically places a call (provided the OnStar system and your vehicles electrical system are still intact). The advisor will attempt to speak to you to evaluate the situation, and contact the nearest emergency services provider.

The OnStar system uses the global positioning system (GPS) to locate your vehicle whenever you place a call. This allows the advisor to quickly contact the nearest services without requiring you to provide detailed directions.

Contact the OnStar advisor if you need assistance with a problem (flat tire, out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The advisor will contact an appropriate agency to come and assist you.

Contact an OnStar advisor if you have an emergency situation. The advisor will contact the nearest emergency services provider (ambulance, fire department, etc.) and advise them of your situation.

This indicator shows you the status of the system.

The system is ready for use.

A call is in progress.

There is a problem with the system. Press the OnStar button to contact an advisor. If the call connects, the advisor will assist you with verifying the systems operation. If you are not able to contact an advisor, take your vehicle to an Acura dealer to have the system diagnosed.

There is a problem with the system while a call is in progress.

The OnStar advisor can help you if you are ever in a minor accident by asking you for information about the accident. Complete, detailed information will make it easier to complete accident reports and insurance claims.

OnStar

Automatic Notif ication of Airbag Deployment

Safe and Sound Plan Features

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

System Status Indicator

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

Accident Assistance

268

The OnStar advisor can give you verbal directions from your current location to a desired destination.

If you need a ride (taxi, limousine service, etc.) the OnStar advisor can make the arrangements for you. Use the OnStar button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you are unable to locate your vehicle in a large parking lot or parking structure, contact OnStar at (888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will remotely activate the exterior lights and the horn, allowing you to locate your vehicle.

From your computer, you can log into www. myonstar.com to make dinner reservations, purchase tickets to events, send flowers, etc.

Using GPS, OnStar can locate your vehicle almost anywhere. If your vehicle is ever stolen, contact OnStar at (888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put you in contact with the proper authorities, and assist them with locating your vehicle.

By sending a signal to your vehicle, the advisor can lock or unlock your vehicles doors. This is helpful if you are away from your vehicle and realize you forgot to lock the doors, or if you have locked the remote or built-in key in your vehicle. To get OnStars assistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR (466-7827).

The Directions and Connections Plan provides these additional features:

The OnStar advisor can give you information on nearby hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals, gas stations, and many other services in any area you are traveling. The advisor can also help you with hotel or restaurant reservations.

OnStar

Directions and Connections Plan Features

Route Support

Ride Assist

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

Online Concierge Services

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Information and Convenience Services

F eatures

269

The OnStar Personal Calling plan is an extra-cost option that gives you the ability to use your vehicles OnStar system as a hands-free cellular telephone.

To sign up for Personal Calling, press the OnStar button in your vehicle, and notify the advisor that youd like to sign up. The advisor will get all the information needed to set up your account, and provide you with your new cellular telephone number. You will need to provide a credit card number, and prepurchase units or minutes of air time (one unit equals 1 minute).

You must use voice commands to give the OnStar system your calling information. To make a phone call:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Dial. OnStar will respond with Phone number to dial, please. Say the entire number without pausing. OnStar will repeat the number. Say Yes to dial the number, or say No to try again. OnStar will respond with Dialing and then repeat the complete telephone number. It will then place the telephone call. When you have finished your conversation, press the white phone button to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking the phone number, or the system responds with the wrong number, say Clear. This will cause the system to erase the number.

OnStar

Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call

270

You can also enter the number one digit at a time. To make a phone call:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Digit dial. OnStar will respond with First digit to dial, please. Say the first digit of the number. OnStar will repeat that digit. Always wait for OnStar to confirm the digit before going to the next digit. Say the second digit of the number. OnStar will repeat that digit. Continue this until you have given OnStar the complete telephone number. Then say Dial.

OnStar will respond with Dialing and then repeat the complete telephone number. It will then place the telephone call. When you have finished your conversation, press the white phone button again to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking a digit of the phone number, or the system responds with the wrong digit, say Clear. This will cause the system to erase the last digit.

If you need to cancel the phone call attempt before entering the complete phone number, say Cancel. The system will cancel the operation and return to Ready.

If the system has difficulty understanding a voice command, it can respond with:

Pardon The system could not match your voice command to one it knows. Repeat the command distinctly.

Slower please The system missed the command because it was not ready for it, or there was too much background noise. Repeat the command after a short pause.

OnStar F

eatures

271

This feature allows you to access most voicemail systems and respond to number requests from computer systems, such as Press 1 for sales; press 2 for service. To use the voice activated keypad during a call, do this:

While in a personal call, press the Voice Activated Key Pad ( ) button.

When someone places a telephone call to you, the audio system will mute and you will hear the ring. Press the white phone button to answer the call. When you have completed the call, press the white phone button again to hang up.

The OnStar system can store up to twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in its memory. When you store these numbers in its memory, you give each one a name tag. When you want to place a telephone call, you can recall the number by giving the system the name tag.

Continue this until you have given OnStar the complete number. Then say Send. OnStar will send the number by dial tones.

Say the second digit of the number. OnStar will repeat that digit.

OnStar will repeat that digit. Always wait for OnStar to confirm the digit before going to the next digit.

Say the first digit of the number you want to send.

OnStar will respond with First digit to send please.

OnStar

Voice Activated Key Pad Incoming Telephone Calls Using Name Tags

272

You can also store a telephone number and its name tag one digit at a time. To store them in the system:

To store a telephone number and its name tag in the system, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Store. OnStar will respond with Phone number to store, please. Say the entire number. OnStar will repeat the number, and then say Yes or No. Say Yes, or say No to try again. OnStar will respond with Name tag, please. Say the name that you want assigned to that telephone number.

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with ready. Say Digit store. OnStar will respond with First digit to store, please. Say the first digit of the number. OnStar will repeat that digit. Say the second digit of the number. OnStar will repeat that digit. Continue this until you have given OnStar the complete telephone number. Then say Store. OnStar will respond with Name tag, please. Say the name that you want assigned to that telephone number.

OnStar

Storing a Name Tag

F eatures

273

Press the Call Answer or Call End button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Delete.

Say Yes.

Say the name tag for the number you want to delete. OnStar will respond with Delete

name tag , yes or no.

OnStar will respond with Deleting name tag .

To redial the last telephone number you called:

Press the Call Answer or Call End button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready.

Say Redial. OnStar will respond with Redialing, then place the telephone call.

OnStar will respond with Name tag, please.

To place a telephone call using a name tag, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Call. OnStar will respond with Name tag, please. Say the name tag for the number you want to call. OnStar will respond with Calling

name tag , then place the telephone call.

If you have forgotten what name tags you have stored, the system will read them to you. Press the white phone button. When the system responds with OnStar ready, say Directory. The system will then repeat all stored name tags.

To delete a name tag and telephone number from memory, do this:

By giving the system a security code that you make up, you can lock out the personal calling and virtual advisor capabilities of the system so unauthorized people cannot make telephone calls. To turn security on or off, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Security. OnStar will respond with First digit of security code, please. Say the first digit of the code.

OnStar

Redialing a Number

Security Code

Placing a Telephone Call Deleting a Name Tag

274

OnStar will repeat that digit. Say the second digit of the code. OnStar will repeat that digit. Say the third digit of the code. OnStar will repeat that digit. Say the fourth digit of the code.

If you forget the security code entered, or someone else enters a security code unknown to you, you must contact an OnStar advisor to reset the code. Press the OnStar button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

You must prepurchase units (minutes) of cellular air time. The OnStar system tracks how many units you have remaining.

OnStar will respond with Security is ON/OFF.

To find out how many units you have remaining, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Units. OnStar will respond with Verify or add. Say Verify. OnStar will respond with You have number units remaining.

To purchase more units of cellular air time, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Units. OnStar will respond with Verify or add. Say Add. OnStar will connect you to an automated system to handle your purchase. It is also possible to press the Onstar button and talk to an advisor to purchase more air time.

You can also call OnStar at (888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information about your account at the OnStar web site, www.onstar.com.

Keeping Track of Units Adding Units

OnStar F

eatures

275

When you subscribe to personal calling, you can also enjoy the benefits of virtual advisor. This feature lets you hear information in your vehicle about weather, sports, news, and stocks. It is even possible to have your e-mail read to you.

Although Virtual Advisor can provide information on many subjects, you can set up a customized profile with OnStar that makes it easier to get information about areas that are of specific interest to you. To do this, you must go to the OnStar web site, www.onstar.com. This is a secure site; you will need your account number and PIN to access your account information and to design your customized profile.

If you do not have Internet access, a default profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your

Personal Identification Number (PIN) when you establish your account with OnStar. You should write down your PIN, and keep it with you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time. Contact the OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button, or by calling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact the OnStar advisor. For security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to you.

To use the virtual advisor from your vehicle, do this:

Press the white phone button. OnStar will respond with OnStar ready. Say Virtual Advisor.

The system will connect you to the Virtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisor will prompt you for the information you desire.

If you would like to hear a list of voice commands that are available, say What are my choices. OnStar is continually upgrading the system, so new commands become available.

OnStar Virtual Advisor Personal Identif ication Number

OnStar

276

OnStar uses the global positioning system (GPS) to locate your vehicle for functions such as route guidance and roadside assistance. GPS is affected by structures that can obstruct the signal, such as tunnels, parking structures, and tall buildings. It may not be possible for OnStar to pinpoint your location if you are in or near such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology to communicate with your vehicle. Cellular coverage varies by location, which may affect the ability to establish a connection, or the quality of the connection.

Onstar has antennas in the rear window (on each side of the high- mount brake light) and on the roof near the high-mount brake light. To avoid reception problems, do not cover the window antennas with metal stickers, and do not cover the

roof antenna with cargo or bicycles on a roof rack.

When you turn off your vehicles ignition, OnStar goes into low-power mode. After 48 hours, it switches to sleep mode to conserve your vehicles battery power. Features such as remote door unlocking and misplaced vehicle assistance will not work after your vehicle has been parked for more than 48 hours.

OnStar is a registered trademark of the OnStar Corporation.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

System Limitations

OnStar F

eatures

277

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to the HFL. The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

HFL recognizes simple voice commands, such as phone numbers and names. It uses these commands to automatically dial, receive, and store numbers. For more information on voice control, see Using Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of the HFL. Instructions for using the HFL begin on page .

Your vehicle is equipped with the HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth technology as a wireless link between it and your Bluetooth compatible cell phone. When you are in your vehicle and your phone is linked to the HFL, youll enjoy hands-free phone use. The HFL is available in both English and French (Canadian models only). To change the language, see page .

With a linked phone, the HFL allows you to send and receive calls in your vehicle without holding the phone.

The HFL can store up to 50 names and phone numbers in its phonebook. With a linked phone, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

Here are the main components of the HFL system:

The HFL microphone is on the ceiling console. The microphone is shared with the navigation system.

To use the HFL, your phone must have approved Bluetooth capability along with the Hands Free Profile. This type of phone is available through many phone makers and cellular carriers. You can also find an approved phone by visiting

In Canada, visit

292

279

281

www.acura.com/handsfreelink. ( www.acura.ca.) or by

calling the Hands Free Link customer support at (888) 528-7876.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Phonebook

Microphone

HandsFreeLink

278

TM

Here is the function of each HFL button:

HFL Talk: This button is used before you give a command, to answer incoming calls, and to confirm system information.

HFL Back: This button is used to end a call, go back to the previous voice control command, and to cancel an operation.

To operate the HFL, use the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. Below the HFL buttons is another set of voice control buttons for the navigation, climate control, and audio systems.

When the HFL is in use, the sound comes through the vehicles front audio system speakers. If the audio system is in use while making a call, the HFL over-rides the audio system. To change the volume level, use the audio system volume knob.

HandsFreeLink

HFL ButtonsAudio System

F eatures

279

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

TM

Signal Strength Indicates the network signal strength of the current phone call. Five bars equals full strength.

ROAM Status Indicates your phone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicates the power remaining in your phones current battery charge. Five bars equals full battery strength.

HFL Mode Indicates when you are dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates the number you entered or the number of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send this information to the HFL.

When you are operating the HFL, or when you manually select HFL on the multi-information display, you will see this information on the screen:

:

HandsFreeLink

Multi-Information Display

280

SIGNAL STRENGTH

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

HFL MODE

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

TM

The HFL is operated by the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. The next few pages provide instructions for all basic features of the HFL.

To hear a list of available options at any time, press the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, Hands free link help.

Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say, Dial 123-456-7891.

To enter a string of numbers in a Call or Dial command, you can say them all at once, or you can separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, 10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press the Talk button while the HFL is speaking. The HFL will then begin listening for your next command.

Here are some guidelines for using voice control:

To enter a command, press the Talk button. Then, after the beep, say your command in a clear, natural tone.

For best system operation, set the climate control fan speed to low, and direct the center vents away from the microphone in the ceiling.

If the HFL does not recognize a command, its response is, Pardon. If it doesnt recognize the command a second time, its response is, Please repeat. If it doesnt recognize the command a third time, it plays the Help prompt.

All phones may not operate identically, and some may cause inconsistent operation of the HFL.

How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control

HandsFreeLink F

eatures

281

NOTE:

TM

To go back one step in a command process, say, Go back, or press the Back button.

When you finish a command sequence, the HFL goes back to its main menu. For example, when you store the name, Eric, the HFL response is, Eric has been stored. The next time you press the Talk button, you will be at the main menu.

If nothing is said while the HFL is listening for a command, the HFL will time out and stop its voice recognition. The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins listening from the point at which it timed out.

To end a command sequence at any time, press and hold the Back button, or press the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say, Cancel. The next time you press the Talk button, the HFL begins from its main menu.

The voice of the HFL can be set to male or female (U.S. models only). Also, the incoming notification can be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no notification.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System. The HFL response is, System options are setup and clear.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Setup. The HFL response is Would you like male or female prompts?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Male or Female, depending on the system voice you want. The HFL response is, Male (Female) prompts have been selected. Would you like an audible notification of an incoming call?

1.

2.

3.

To set up the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Up the System

282

TM

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button. If you say Yes after the beep, the HFL response is, Would you like a ring tone or a prompt? If you say No after the beep, the HFL returns to its main menu. Saying No will result in no ring tone or prompt playback during an incoming call. The audio system will still mute, and a message will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Ring tone or Prompt. If you choose Ring tone you will hear a ring tone through the audio speakers to announce an incoming call. If you choose Prompt, you will hear this message to announce an incoming call: You have an incoming call.

Your Bluetooth compatible phone with HandsFree Profile must be paired to the HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving. For pairing, your phone must be in its Discovery mode. Up to six phones can be paired to the HFL. The following procedure works for most phones. If you cannot pair your phone to the HFL with this procedure, refer to your phones operating manual, talk to your phone retailer, or call the HandsFreeLink customer support at (888) 528-7876. During the pairing process, turn off any previously paired phones before pairing a new phone.

4.

5.

HandsFreeLink

Pairing Your Phone

F eatures

283

NOTE:

TM

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone set up. The HFL response is Phone set up options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pair. The HFL response is The pairing process requires operation of your mobile phone. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. State a four- digit code for pairing. Note this code. It will be requested by the phone.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the four-digit code you want to use. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4. The HFL response is, 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The HFL response is Searching for a Bluetooth phone.

Steps 5 and 6 show a common way to get your phone into its Discovery mode. If these steps do not work on your phone, refer to the phones operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phone to get it into its Search mode. The phone will search for the HFL. When it comes up, select HandsFreeLink from the list of options displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enter the four-digit code from step 3 into your phone. The HFL response is A new phone has been found. What would you like to name this phone?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say Erics phone. The HFL response is Erics phone has been successfully paired. Returning to the main menu.

If you want to pair another phone, repeat steps 1 through 7.

Once the paring process is completed, AcuraLink may display a connection confirmation screen. This screen is used to create a data connection between your cell phone and the AcuraLink system. You can choose to setup the data connection now, or do it later. If you want to do it now, exit the HFL menu by pressing the HFL Back button one or more times.

1. 4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

8.

HandsFreeLink

284

NOTE:

TM

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. The HFL response is Which phone would you like to edit?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to rename. For example, say Erics phone. The HFL response is What is the new name for Erics phone?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new name of the phone. For example, say Lisas phone. The HFL response is, The name has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is, Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete. The HFL response is, Which phone would you like to delete?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to delete. For example say Erics phone. The HFL response is Would you like to delete Erics phone?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Preparing to delete Erics phone. Say OK to continue. Otherwise, say Go back, or Cancel.

Press and release the Talk button. If you say OK after the beep, the HFL response is The phone has been deleted. Returning to the main menu. If you say Go back, or Cancel, the phone will not be deleted.

2.

3.

4. 1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink F

eatures

285

TM

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being used, do this:

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. The HFL response is Phone setup options are status, pair, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Next phone. The HFL response is Searching for the next phone. The HFL then disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone. If no other phones are found, the first phone remains linked.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the name of each paired phone. When all phones paired to the system have been read, the HFL response is The entire list has been read. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Status. An example of the HFL response is, Erics phone is linked. Battery strength is three bars. Signal strength is five bars, and the phone is roaming. Returning to the main menu.

2.

1. 1.

2.

1.

HandsFreeLink

286

TM

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob.

You can make calls using any phone number, or by using a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called. During a call, the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch.

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is, What name or number would you like to call/ dial?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to call. For example, say 123 456 7891. The HFL response is 123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or continue to add numbers.

To end the call, press the Back button.

With your phone on and the ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. The HFL response is What name or number would you like to call/ dial?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to call. For example, say

Eric. The HFL response is Would you like to call Eric?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob.

To end the call, press the Back button.

To redial the last number called by the phone, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Redial. The HFL response is, Redialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

4.

To make a call using a phone number, do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook, do this:

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink F

eatures

287

TM

If you receive a call when you are not on the phone, the HFL interrupts the audio system (if it is on), and plays the incoming call notification, if activated. To answer the call, press the Talk button and begin speaking. If you dont want to answer the call, press the Back button.

The HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system. You can also program account numbers into the HFL phonebook for easy retrieval during menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The HFL response is, What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to send. For example, say 1, 2, 3. The HFL response is 1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to add numbers.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The HFL response is What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to send. For example, say Account number. The HFL response is Would you like to send account number?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

If your phone has Call Waiting, and you receive a call when you are on the phone, press and release the Talk button to answer it. When you do this, the original call is placed on hold. To return to the original call, press the Talk button again. If you dont want to answer the new call, disregard it, and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the Back button.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or Names During a Call

HandsFreeLink

288

TM

During a call, you can transfer it from the HFL to your phone, or from your phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Transfer. The audio switches from the HFL to the phone.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Transfer. The audio switches from your phone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute or unmute your voice to the person you are talking to.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. The HFL response is, Mute is active.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. The HFL response is, Mute is canceled.

The HFL phonebook can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers. These can be any types of numbers. For example, you can store a phone number and use it to make a call, or you can store an account number and use it during a call to a menu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Store. The HFL response is, What name would you like to store?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say Eric or say account number. The HFL response is What is the number for Eric, or What is the number for account number?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number. For example, say 123 456 7891. The HFL response is 123 456 7891.

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to your phone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to the HFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

CONTINUED

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting up the Phonebook

HandsFreeLink F

eatures

289

TM

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to delete. For example, say Eric. The HFL response is Do you want to delete Eric?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is, The name has been deleted. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is, The Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new number for Eric. For example, say 987 654 3219. The HFL response is, 987 654 3219.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The HFL response is The number has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is, Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete. The HFL response is, What name would you like to delete?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. The HFL response is Eric (or account number) has been stored. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. The HFL response is, What name would you like to edit?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to edit. For example, say Eric. The HFL response is What is the new number for Eric?

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1. 2.

1.

3.

5.

To list all names in the phonebook, do this:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

290

TM

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Clear. The HFL response is, This process will clear all paired phones, clear all entries in the phonebook, and clear the passcode. Is this what you would like to do?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Preparing to clear all paired phones, all phonebook entries, and the passcode. This may take up to 2 minutes to complete. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say OK to proceed, or say Go back or Cancel.

If you said OK, after a short period of time, the HFL response is, System has been cleared. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When the end of the list is reached, the HFL response is, The entire list has been read. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. The HFL response is Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, and list.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. The HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When it says the name you want to call, for example, Eric, press the Talk button, and then say Call. The HFL response is, Would you like to call Eric?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The HFL response is Calling. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob.

This operation clears the HFL of your passcode, your paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook. Clearing is recommended before you sell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System. The HFL response is, System options are setup and clear.

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list, do this:

To clear the system, do this:

Clearing the System

HandsFreeLink F

eatures

291

TM

If there are paired phones without French name tags, the HFL response is Pour que le systme identifie les tlphones qui ont t jumels dans une autre langue, les noms des tlphones doivent tre r-enregistrs.

If there are paired phones without French name tags the following prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example, Quel est le nom Franais pour Pauls phone ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Tlphone de Paul. The HFL response is, Quel est le nom Franais pour Pats phone

? Press and release the Talk button. Say Tlphone de Pat. After all paired phones missing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt, Retour au menu principal.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Changer Langue. The HFL response is, English or Franais?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. If there are no paired phones without English name tags, the HFL response is The language has been changed. Returning to the main menu.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say English. The HFL response is, You have selected English. Name tags that were stored while in French mode will not be accessible in English mode. Would you like to continue?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Oui. If there are no paired phones without French name tags, the HFL response is La langue a t change. Retour au menu principal.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Franais. The HFL response is Vous avez slectionn Franais. Les noms enregistrs en mode Anglais ne seront pas accessible en mode Franais. Voulez-vous continuer?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Change language. The HFL response is English or Franais?

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

To change from French to English, do this:

To change from English to French, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Changing Language Canadian models only

292

NOTE:

TM

If there are paired phones without English name tags, the HFL response is The language has been changed. For the system to identify phones that were paired while in another language, the phone names need to be re-recorded.

If there are paired phones without English name tags, the following prompts will continue.

The HFL says, for example, What is the English name for Tlphone de Paul ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pauls phone. The HFL response is What is the English name for Tlphone de Pat ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pats phone. After all paired phones missing an English name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will say Returning to the main menu.

In addition, you cannot use the HFL while using AcuraLink.

When OnStar is activated during an HFL call or when using voice control, the HFL call is placed on hold, or the HFL stops its voice recognition. The HFL call will continue when OnStar use is ended. To operate the HFL again, press the Talk button. Then after the beep, say the appropriate command.

4.

HandsFreeLink

HFL Limitations

F eatures

293

NOTE:

TM

294

Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 296 .................Fuel Recommendation . 296

.........Service Station Procedures . 297 .....................................Refueling .297

.TIGHTEN Fuel Cap Message .298 Opening and Closing

.................................the Hood .299 ....................................Oil Check .301

..............Engine Coolant Check .301 ...............................Fuel Economy . 302

...Accessories and Modifications . 303 .............................Carrying Cargo . 305

Before Driving B

efore D

riving

295

Help assure your vehicles future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until the scheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

We recommend quality gasolines containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, in areas where it is available, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your authorized dealer for service.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

296

CONTINUED

Park with the drivers side closest to the service station pump.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume and up to 15% MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-related information, please refer to your

. Open the fuel fill door by pressing the button on the drivers door. (To open the fuel fill door manually, see page .)

1.

2.

412

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

B efore

D riving

297

FUEL FILL CAP

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to top off the tank. Leave some room for the fuel to expand with temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicles fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapors from going into the atmosphere. Consult your dealer.

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi-information display after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, after you start the engine or while you are driving. Turn the ignition switch off and confirm the fuel cap is installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then retighten until it clicks at least once.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi- information display (see right column on this page), and the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.

3.

4.

5.

6.

410

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

298

Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release lever located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.

Turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL goes out after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If it does not go out, have your dealer inspect the vehicle. For more information, see page .

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message, displayed after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or start the engine, should go off after tightening the fuel cap, turning the ignition switch off and on, then driving over 12 mph (US) or 20 km/h (Canada) for at least 10 minutes. Due to different driving conditions, it may take a few drive trips to make the message go off.

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message displayed while driving should go off after tightening the fuel cap, turning the ignition switch off and on, then driving over 30 mph (US) or 48 km/h (Canada) for at least 45 seconds. Due to different driving conditions, it may take a few drive trips to make the message go off.

If the system still detects a loose or missing fuel cap, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If a loose or missing fuel cap was not the cause of the TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message coming on, the MIL will also come on. When the MIL comes on, the message goes off.

1.

410

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Hood

Service Station Procedures B

efore D

riving

299

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Reach between the hood and the front bumper with your finger. Slide the latch handle up.

To close the hood, lower the hood to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then firmly press down on the front edge of the hood. Make sure it is securely latched.

3.2.

Service Station Procedures

300

LATCH

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark, see on page .

Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see

on page .

4.

1.

2.

3.

366

363

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant Check

Adding Engine Oil

Oil Check

Adding Engine Coolant

Service Station Procedures B

efore D

riving

301

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK

Combine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.

an underinflated tire causes more rolling resistance, which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud on your vehicles underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel mileage and reduces the chance of corrosion.

Always drive in the highest gear possible.

Refer to on page for information

about checking other items on your vehicle.

Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance schedule. See

on page .

Drive moderately. Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking use more fuel.

Try to maintain a constant speed. Every time you slow down and speed up, your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use cruise control when appropriate.

356

356

For example,

Improving Fuel EconomyOwners Maintenance Checks

Owners Maintenance Checks

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

302

When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicles computer controlled systems, such as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Acura accessories, can make your vehicle unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.

Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicles handling and stability (see page ).

Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows as these may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page ) or interfere with the proper operation of your vehicle.

306

413

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications B

efore D

riving

303

Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicles anti-lock brakes and other systems.

Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicles safety systems could make the systems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling and stability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.

Non-Acura wheels can cause excessive stress on suspension components and are not compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system.

Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non- Acura components could seriously affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

304

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:

Glove box Front door and seat-back pockets Console compartment

In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.

Trunk Utility pocket

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

305

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX

UTILITY POCKETCONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

Steps for determining correct load limit:

Locate the statement, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 850 lbs on your vehicles placard. [The placard is on the drivers doorjamb.]

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the maximum load is 850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.

(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from 850 lbs (395 kg).

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded in the vehicle. That weight may unsafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity in step 4.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or the gross axle weight rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (see page ).

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles, and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles. This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

341

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

306

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of the rear shelf. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats and interfere with the pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of

, follow the instructions on page .

If you carry any items on a roof rack, be sure the total weight of the rack and the items does not exceed the maximum allowable weight. Please contact your dealer for further information.

If you carry any items extending through the trunk pass-through, tie down or secure all items that could be thrown around the vehicle and hurt someone during a crash or sudden stop.

56

carbon monoxide poisoning

Carrying Items in the Passenger Compartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

307

The cargo floor hooks can also be used to tie down and secure items on the floor.

There are hooks on the floor and both sides of the trunk. They can be used to install the cargo net for securing items. The side cargo hooks are designed to hold light items (maximum load: 6 lbs or 3 kgs for each hook). Heavy objects may damage the side hooks.

Cargo Hooks

Carrying Cargo

308

SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS

........................Preparing to Drive . 310 .......................Starting the Engine . 311

Check Starting System .................................Message . 312

..............Automatic Transmission . 313 ...........................SH-AWD System . 320

...........................................Parking . 321 .............................Braking System . 322

................Anti-lock Brakes(ABS) . 323 Collision Mitigation Brake System

......................................(CMBS) . 325 Tire Pressure

...Monitoring System (TPMS) . 335 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 339 ...........................Towing a Trailer . 341

...................Towing Your Vehicle . 346

This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the automatic transmission. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the SH-AWD system, the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system, the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), the collision mitigation brake system (CMBS), and facts you need if you are planning to tow a trailer.

Driving D

riving

309

Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure.

Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (see page ).

Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and the trunk are securely closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle.

Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see pages and ).

When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see page , and

).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

17

151

155154

78

143

7061

Preparing to Drive

310

If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down, and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. If the engine still does not start, return to step 5.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, then release the ignition switch. You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the starter motor runs for about 6 to 9

seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

146

Starting the Engine D

riving

311

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- coded key (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignition switch has to be held in the START (III) position manually until the engine starts. The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your dealer inspect your vehicle.

Starting the Engine

Check Starting System Message

312

These indicators on the instrument panel show which position the shift lever is in. In the Sequential SportShift Mode, the M indicator next to the D indicator comes on, and the illuminated number under the low oil pressure indicator shows you the gear you have selected.

To shift from any position, press firmly on the brake pedal and slide the lever along the guide on the console. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator, there is a problem in the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi-information display (see page

).78

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission D

riving

313

To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park. The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so you cannot accidentally shift to reverse from neutral or any other driving position when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10 km/h).

If there is a problem in the reverse lockout system, or your vehicles

battery is disconnected or goes dead, you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to

on page ).

Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.This position mechani-

cally locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see on page .

Press the brake pedal to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from neutral to reverse, come to a complete stop and then shift.

Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 5) for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher engine speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster.

If you cannot shift to reverse when the vehicle is stopped, press the brake pedal, slowly shift to neutral, and then shift to reverse.

318

318 Do this:

Press the brake pedal, then move the shift lever.

Move the lever.

To shift from: P to R

R to N N to D D toD D to D D to N N to R R to P

3

3

Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Automatic Transmission

314

With the shift lever in D position, you can select the Sequential SportShift mode to shift gears much like a manual transmission, but without a clutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShift mode, move the shift lever further to the drivers side. To return to D, move the shift lever to the passengers side. In Sequential SportShift mode, each time you push forward on the shift lever, the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull back on the lever to downshift. The number of the gear selected is displayed on the instrument panel.

When you move the shift lever from D to M position, the display shows the selected gear.

While in the Sequential SportShift mode, you can also shift up or down using the (right side) or (left side) paddle shifters on the right and left side of the steering wheel.

For up shift, press the right side ( ) paddle shifter. For down shift, press the left side ( ) paddle shifter.

CONTINUED

Sequential SportShift Mode

Automatic Transmission D

riving

315

SELECTED GEAR

( ) DOWN SHIFT

( ) UP SHIFT

PADDLE SHIFTER

The transmission may automatically downshift from the higher gear to the lower gear under these conditions:

Driving on level roads and downhill

Driving uphill

Downshifting gives you more power when climbing, and provides engine braking when going down a steep hill.

The gear indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to the higher gear.

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4

The transmission remains in the selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.

Speed range

under 17 mph (27 km/h)

under 38 mph (60 km/h)

When you accelerate away from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear. You have to manually upshift between first and fifth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometers red zone.

The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed is under 8 mph (13 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at a speed that would cause the engine to exceed the redline in a lower gear, the transmission does not downshift.

If the vehicle speed slows to below the redline of the selected lower gear position while the indicator is flashing, the transmission downshifts, and the display shows the selected lower gear.

Speed range

under 41 mph (65 km/h)

under 47 mph (75 km/h)

Automatic Transmission

316

The table shows the speed ranges for upshifting and downshifting. When you are in Sequential

SportShift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, push forward on the shift lever to shift to second gear. You will see 2 in the display. Starting out in second gear will help to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.

If you start out in second gear, the transmission will be fixed in that gear.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

The transmission will not automatically downshift to first gear even when the vehicle speed is under 8 mph (13 km/h). You need to shift down to first gear manually.

Speed range

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

over 8 mph (13 km/h)

over 17 mph (27 km/h)

over 37 mph (60 km/h)

Speed range

under 56 mph (90 km/h)

under 93 mph (150 km/h)

under 130 mph (209 km/h)

CONTINUED

Starting in Second Gear

Automatic Transmission D

riving

317

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

Make sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) position.

Set the parking brake.

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometers red zone.

This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal does not work.

This position is similar to D, except only the first three gears are selected. Use D when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to provide engine braking when going down a steep hill. D can also keep the transmission from cycling between third, fourth, and fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D or D, you can get the transmission to automatically downshift by pushing the accelerator pedal to the floor. The transmission will shift down one, two, or three gears, depending on your speed.

To release the reverse lockout, make sure the ignition switch is in the ACCESSORY(I) position.

1.

2.

3

3

3

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseDrive (D )

Automatic Transmission

3

318

If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover next to the shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a metal fingernail file to remove the cover. Carefully pry on the edge of the cover.

Insert a built-in key into the shift lock release slot.

Push down on the built-in key, and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.

Remove the built-in key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the drivers side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.

To release the reverse lockout, move the shift lever from neutral to reverse, then to Park.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission D

riving

319

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments. The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi-information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels. Each wheel: right front (RF), left front (LF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR), has its own torque indicator.

When cruise control is on while driving, the torque distribution monitor is not shown.

The SH-AWD system is a full time all-wheel-drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently, according to the driving conditions.

When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving, such as cruising on level roads at the same speed, the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque. This is not a system problem. The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution.

While the SH-AWD system helps to enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations, it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

SH-AWD System

320

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

If the SH-AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on, and the multi-information display shows an SH-AWD message, there is a problem with the system. Your vehicle still has normal front-wheel drive with vehicle stability assist (VSA), but does not have the advantages of SH-AWD. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb.

Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline.

Set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

SH-AWD System, Parking

Parking

Parking Tips

D riving

321

Check the brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. Emergency Brake Assist System gains the stopping force when you depressed the brake pedal hard in an emergent situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, and reduces their effectiveness. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

322

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the brakes from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal as you steer away from the hazard. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page .

When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.

411You should never pump the brake pedal;

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) D

riving

323

ABS INDICATOR

on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock.

Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

It only helps with steering control during braking.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent the loss of stability.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

324

The CMBS does not activate if the speed difference between your vehicles is less than 10 mph (15 km/h). CMBS may also not activate if you turn the steering wheel to avoid the collision.

The CMBS consists of a radar sensor in the front grille, a brake actuator in the engine compartment, an indicator on the instrument panel, seat belt e-pretensioners on the front seats, and an on/off switch on the dashboard.

When the CMBS activates, the brake lights also come on.

The collision mitigation brake system (CMBS) can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle hitting the vehicle in front of you. It is designed to reduce the speed of your vehicle before an unavoidable collision occurs and, if possible, to alert you to a potential collision while there is time to prevent it. Here is a brief description of what the CMBS can do:

When your speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h), the CMBS radar sensor in the front grille can sense a vehicle ahead of you. When your vehicle gets too close to the vehicle ahead of you, the system may activate a warning beep, causing automatic application of the brakes, and causing the e-pretensioners to tighten the front seat belts (see page ).23

If equipped

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Overview

D riving

325

RADAR SENSOR

BRAKE ACTUATOR

SEAT BELT E-PRETENSIONER

The radar sensor is located behind the Acura emblem in the front grille. If the emblem is covered with mud, dirt, dead leaves, wet snow, etc., or if you put a sticker on it, the CMBS will automatically shut off, and the CMBS indicator on the instrument panel will come on. You will also see a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR message on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.

Always keep the emblem clean. If it gets dirty, clean it with water or a mild detergent. Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder.

Do not allow anything to impact the radar sensor or the emblem. If either of these parts receives a strong impact, turn off the system by pressing the CMBS Off switch, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the front grille ever needs to be repaired, consult a dealer first.

There are three bolts on the sides of the radar sensor. Do not tamper with these bolts, or you may cause the system to malfunction.

If the front emblem or the radar sensor every needs to be removed, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Radar Sensor

326

EMBLEM

BOLTS (Do not tamper)

When the CMBS is on, the radar sensor constantly scans for vehicles ahead of you. This means that driving on a road with a few or no vehicles could cause a CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR message to appear on the multi-information display. This is normal and not a cause for concern.

The radar sensor may not always scan as intended. Here are two examples:

The tires are not correctly maintained. Always make sure the tire pressures are correct (see page ), and that the tires are the correct size and in good condition (see Tires on page ).

Your vehicle is tilted because of a heavy load in the rear or from modifications to the suspension. Do not overload your vehicle (see Carrying Cargo on page ), and do not make any modifications to the suspension (see Accessories and Modifications on page ).

305

303

384

384

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

327

If the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle or object ahead of you, it alerts you with an audible and a visual alarm.

The audible alarm is a constant beeping sound; the visual alert is an amber colored BRAKE message that flashes in the multi-information display. If these alarms come on, take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

To turn the CMBS off, press the CMBS OFF switch on the dashboard for about 1 second. When you do this, a beeper sounds, a CMBS indicator on the instrument panel comes on, and a CMBS OFF message appears on the multi-information display. To turn the system back on, press the switch again for about 1 second.

Collision Alarm CMBS OFF Switch

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

328

CMBS OFF SWITCH

The CMBS will automatically recover when these conditions are improved.

Any of the conditions below can cause the CMBS to shut off. When the system shuts off, the CMBS indicator in the instrument panel comes on, and a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message appears on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.

This indicator comes on for several seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It also comes on and stays on when you turn the CMBS off by pressing the CMBS OFF switch.

An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

Extended off-road or mountainous driving.

Driving your vehicle with the parking brake applied.

Driving your vehicle in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

A dirty emblem on the front grille.

CONTINUED

CMBS IndicatorAutomatic Shut Off

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

329

CMBS INDICATOR

The CMBS indicator normally comes on under these conditions:

When you manually turn off the system.

When the system shuts off automatically.

When you drive in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the VSA system indicator comes on (see page ).

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the CMBS indicator should come on for a few seconds, then go off. If the indicator comes on at any other time and a CHECK CMBS SYSTEM message appears on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the CMBS. You can still drive your vehicle, but CMBS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

To turn the CMBS back on, make sure the vehicle is stopped and the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, then press the CMBS OFF switch for about 1 second.

If anything covers the front grille (dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow, etc.).

339

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

330

CONTINUED

A vehicle cuts in front of you and brakes suddenly.

When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.

Driving in heavy, stop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.

Immediately after you drive off.

The CMBS may not activate under some conditions. Here are a few examples:

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.

A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Limitations

D riving

331

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

Even with little or no chance of a collision, the CMBS may activate under these conditions:

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.

When you approach or pass a vehicle ahead of you that is turning left or right in an intersection.

When you change lanes quickly, then overtake the vehicle ahead of you.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

332

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

The CMBS is not designed to detect pedestrians.

CONTINUED

When you pass a low bridge at high speed.

When you go over a sharp-edged speed bump at high speed.

When you approach train tracks at the bottom of a hill and you do not apply the brakes.

Because of the road condition (curved, winding, etc.) or the state of your vehicle (turning angle, lane position, etc.), CMBS can sometimes mistake a stationary object (light pole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicle ahead of you and temporarily operate. This is normal.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS) D

riving

333

LOW BRIDGE

RAILS

YOUR VEHICLE

SIGN, POLE, etc.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The main purpose of the CMBS is to reduce the severity of injuries caused by an unavoidable collision. While the CMBS may help to alert you and minimize the severity of a collision, it may not activate in every dangerous situation.

Even with the CMBS, it is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately, according to the driving conditions.

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Important Safety Reminder

334

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure indicator in the instrumental panel and the appropriate tire position indicator on the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display (see page

) to come on.

For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.

When the low tire pressure indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. The multi-information display also shows a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message (see page ). You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicles tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure indicator may come on unexpectedly.

Refer to page for tire inflation guidelines.

383 336

335

CONTINUED

Low Tire Pressure Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

335

Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.

If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure and tire monitor indicators will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

When all tire pressures are normal, the multi-information display will show TIRE PRESSURE OK SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owners manual (see page ).

If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire.

When any of the tires has low pressure, the multi-information display shows a TIRE PRESSURE ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL message (see page ).

After you replace the flat tire with the spare, the low tire pressure indicator stays on. This is normal; the system is not monitoring the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.

384

397

74

Changing a Tire with TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

336

CONTINUED

If there is a system error with the TPMS, the multi-information display shows a SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR message (see page ), and the tire pressure readings will not be displayed. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If any of the tires have low pressure, the multi-information display will show a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message. You will also see one or more low pressure tire positions blinking in the display (see page

).

When the TPMS is functioning normally, you can press the SEL/ RESET button on the steering wheel to see the pressure readings of each tire in psi (U.S. models) or kPa (Canadian models) (see page ).

78

338

335 76

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Readings

D riving

337

VEHICLE ICON

U.S.

If one or more tires have low pressure, the low tire pressure indicator on the instrument panel also comes on (see page ).

When cruise control is on while driving, the pressure reading cannot be checked by the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message (see page ). If you see this message, the system is not monitoring tire pressure. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

335

340

79

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Check TPMS System Message

338

CANADA

When VSA activates, you will see the VSA activation indicator blink (see page ).

If this indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on, or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, there may be a problem with the VSA system. Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible (see page ).

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engines output and by selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicles entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

65

65

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CONTINUED

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System D

riving

339

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page ).

Deactivate the VSA system if you need to drive with the compact spare tire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA.

This switch is at the right side of the left vent. Press it to turn VSA on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

When the VSA system indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal braking and cornering ability, but it does not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicator comes on (see page ), or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message (see page ), the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

335

338

384

397

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

340

VSA OFF SWITCH

Your vehicle has been designed to primarily carry passengers and their cargo. You can also use it to tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the guidelines in this section.

The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitch should be approximately 10 percent of the trailer weight. Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

The maximum allowable weight of the trailer and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing a load that is too heavy can seriously affect your vehicles handling and performance. It can also damage the engine and drivetrain.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer D

riving

341

Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60 percent of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40 percent toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicle and trailer weights are within limits is to have them checked at a public scale.

Using a suitable scale or a special tongue load gauge, check the tongue load the first time you set up a towing combination (a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer), then recheck the tongue load whenever the conditions change.

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the tongue load is: 4,980 lbs (2,260 kg)

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs (1,215 kg) on the front axle, and 2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear axle.

Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment, depending on the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you tow. To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Acura equipment whenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailer sales or rental agency, and follow the guidelines in the rest of this section. Also make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, and local regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle must be properly bolted to the underbody.

Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Accessories

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

Hitches

342

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Make sure the chains are secured to the trailer and hitch, and that they cross under the tongue and can catch the trailer if it becomes unhitched. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not let the chains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailer having a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more be equipped with its own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap into your vehicles hydraulic system. No matter how successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, and local regulations. Check with your local recreational vehicle dealer for the requirements in your area, and use only equipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicles electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty.

Safety Chains Trailer LightsTrailer Brakes

Towing a Trailer D

riving

343

Many states and Canadian provinces require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if they dont, you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

When preparing to tow, and before driving away, be sure to check the following:

The vehicle has been properly serviced, and the tires, brakes, suspension, cooling system, and lights are in good operating condition.

All items in or on the trailer are properly secured and cannot shift while you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and any other attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are within limits.

The trailer has been properly serviced and is in good condition, and the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

Your vehicle tires and spare are properly inflated, and the trailer tires and spare are inflated as recommended by the trailer maker.

Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

344

The added weight, length, and height of a trailer will affect your vehicles handling and performance, so driving with a trailer requires some special driving skills and techniques.

For your safety and the safety of others, take time to practice driving maneuvers before heading for the open road, and follow the guidelines below.

When driving uphill and downhill, use the Sequential SportShift mode to provide the proper engine power and engine braking on each gear. Select fourth, third, second, or first gear; depending on the vehicle speeds and road condition. Do not use fifth gear. The recommended speed range for each gear position is shown in the table.

Make turns more slowly and wider than normal. The trailer tracks a smaller arc than your vehicle, and it can hit or run over something the vehicle misses. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly as this could cause the trailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in all driving situations, and obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use D position when towing a trailer on level roads. D is the proper shift lever position to use when towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See

on the next page for additional gear information.)

Gear position

1

2

3

4

Speed range

0 19 mph (0 30 km/h)

19 31 mph (30 50 km/h)

31 41 mph (50 65 km/h)

over 41 mph (over 65 km/h)

3

CONTINUED

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer D

riving

345

Crosswinds and air turbulence caused by passing trucks can disrupt your steering and cause trailer to sway. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed, and steer straight ahead. Do not try to make quick steering or braking corrections.

Follow all normal precautions when parking, including firmly setting the parking brake and putting the transmission in Park. Also, place wheel chocks at each of the trailers tires.

When driving down hills, reduce your speed, and shift down to second gear. Do not ride the brakes, and remember, it will take longer to slow down and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill, use the foot brake or parking brake. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator, as this can cause the automatic transmission to overheat.

When climbing hills, closely watch your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (hot) mark, turn the air conditioning off, reduce speed and, if necessary, pull to the side of the road to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shifts frequently while going up a hill, shift to D .

Always drive slowly and have someone guide you when backing up. Grip the of the steering wheel; turn the wheel to the left to get the trailer to move to the left, and turn the wheel right to move the trailer to the right.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page .421

3

bottom

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Parking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle

Towing Your Vehicle

346

This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.

This section also includes instructions on how to read the maintenance messages in the multi- information display, a maintenance record, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 348 ....................Maintenance Minder . 349 ....................Maintenance Record . 359

..............................Fluid Locations . 361 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 362

........................Adding Engine Oil . 363 .........Changing the Oil and Filter . 364

..............................Engine Coolant . 366 ....................Windshield Washers . 368

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 368 ....................................Brake Fluid . 369

....................Power Steering Fluid . 370 ....................................Timing Belt . 371

.............................................Lights . 372 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 379

.....................................Floor Mats . 380 .................................Wiper Blades . 381

...............................................Tires . 383 ...................Checking the Battery . 390

.............................Vehicle Storage . 392

441

Maintenance M

aintenance

347

To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.

Let the engine and exhaust system cool before touching any parts.

Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so.

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

348

Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations and schedules in this owners manual.

Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

One of the most convenient and important features of the multi- information display on your vehicle is the maintenance minder.

Based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life.

The system also displays the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.

To see the remaining engine oil life displayed on the lower right corner on the multi-information display as a percentage, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life appears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life is displayed according to the table shown below.

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100% 91% 90% 81% 80% 71% 70% 61% 60% 51% 50% 41% 40% 31% 30% 21% 20% 16% 15% 11% 10% 6% 5% 1%

0%

Displayed Engine Oil Life

(%) 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0%

73

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life

M aintenance

349

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance schedule code indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page and for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE OIL along with the percentage of oil life remaining and the maintenance item code, appear on the lower part of the multi- information display.357 358

Maintenance Minder

350

MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE CODE

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFT

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the same maintenance items SERVICE DUE SOON was displayed with. When you see this message have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE OIL, along with 5%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the lower part of the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 1 5 percent (see page ).349

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

351

Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see OIL LIFE 100% on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi- information display.

If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the maintenance minder as follows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

To reset the engine oil life, press the or button on the steering wheel to select RESET on the display, and press the SEL/ RESET button.

To cancel resetting the oil life, press the or button on the steering wheel to select CANCEL on the display, and press the SEL/ RESET button.

If you do not complete the reset procedure within 30 seconds after selecting the reset mode, the mode will be canceled automatically.

If you have the required service performed but do not reset the display, or reset the display without performing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.

If the oil life minder is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until it is.

1.

2. 3.

Maintenance Minder

352

U.S.

CANADA

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the oil life minder as previously described.

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0 %, the multi- information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code. This message is displayed when the total mileage after reaching 0 % engine oil life is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian models).

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life minder. The message SERVICE OIL, along with 0%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the lower part of the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 1 percent.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

353

And also, the percentage 0 keeps blinking on the display.

If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0 %, the multi- information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message, the total mileage after the remaining oil life became 0 %, and the maintenance item code.

This message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0 % message.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as previously described.

The maximum total mileage shown with this message is 999 mile (for U.S. models) or 999 km (for Canadian models).

The message will be canceled if the or button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or button to see the message again.

This particular message is displayed when the mileage after the engine oil life became 0 % reaches 10 miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian models).

Maintenance Minder

354

MAINTENANCE CODE CANADA

U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

This particular message is displayed when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing 0 %.

Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out the maintenance record. Check your warranty booklet for more information.

We recommend the use of Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high- quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.

The maximum total negative mileage is 999 mile (for U.S. models) or

999 km (for Canadian models).

When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life minder, the message SERVICE OIL, along with the maintenance item code and the total negative mileage after the oil life became 0 percent, will be displayed on the lower part of the multi-information display.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

355

U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.

Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Check the fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid level monthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate lights monthly. See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the Multi-Information Display.

301

366

368

369

383

372

Maintenance Minder

Owners Maintenance Checks Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are certif ied to EPA standards.

356

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

357

:

Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil Replace engine oil and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Visually inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and line (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections

A B

Symbol 1

If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-Information Display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

356

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

Maintenance Minder

358

Maintenance Sub Items Replace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under

20F, 29C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/ 100,000 km (Canada)

Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant

Symbol 1 2

3

4

5

Symbol 6

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record M

aintenance

359

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Maintenance Performed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

Maintenance Performed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s) completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your-Acura maintenance journal.

Maintenance Record

360

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Maintenance Performed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

Maintenance Performed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.

Fluid Locations M

aintenance

361

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)

WASHER FLUID (Black cap)

POWER STEERING FLUID (Red cap)

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by several covers. You may need to remove the covers when you perform some simple maintenance work.

All of the covers are secured by holding clips.

To remove the front bulkhead cover, remove the holding clips with a flat- tipped screwdriver.

To remove the left or right engine compartment cover, remove the holding clips by loosening the pins in the center of the fastener.

To remove the battery cover, turn the knob of the fastener (see page

).391

Engine Compartment Covers

362

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

RIGHT COMPARTMENT COVER LEFT COMPARTMENT COVER

BATTERY COVER

Install the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level. Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says For Gasoline Engines. The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the containers label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil M

aintenance

363

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.

Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal, and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals given on the maintenance schedule.

Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled mechanic.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

364

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.

Refill the engine with the recommended oil. Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to:

Check the oil filter to make sure its gasket did not stick to the engine block. A stuck gasket could cause an oil leak.

Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Changing the Oil and Filter M

aintenance

365

OIL FILTER

29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container, and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti- freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

366

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

When the radiator and engine are cool, relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

3.1.

2.

4.

5.

Engine Coolant M

aintenance

367

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.

Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground. Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather. When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition them.

If the washer fluid is low, a WASHER FLUID LOW message appears on the multi-information display.

Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission as shown.

Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

368

NOTICE:

UPPER MARK LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicles paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoirs monthly.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of mileage.

If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick tube to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

If you are not sure how to add fluid, contact your dealer.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission fluid). If its not available, you may use a DEXRON III automatic transmission fluid as a temporary replacement. However, continued use can affect the shift quality. Have the transmission flushed and refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is convenient.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

5. 6.

CONTINUED

Brake Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid M

aintenance

369

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

After removing the right engine compartment cover (see page ), check the level on the side of the reservoir when the engine is cold. The fluid should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not, add power steering fluid to the UPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

A low power steering fluid level can indicate a leak in the system. Check the fluid level frequently, and have the system inspected as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. You may use another power steering fluid as an emergency replacement, but have the power steering system flushed and refilled with Honda PSF as soon as possible.

362

Power Steering Fluid

Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

370

MAX MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

In very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C).

In very low temperatures (under 20F, 29C).

If you frequently tow a trailer.

The timing belt should be replaced at the intervals shown on the maintenance minder. Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if you regularly drive your vehicle in one or more of these conditions:

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Timing Belt

M aintenance

371

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t or right lock and holding it there can damage the power steering pump.

The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.

Your vehicle has halogen high beam headlight bulbs which are also used for the daytime running light. Handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic headlight adjusting system that adjusts the vertical aim of the low beam headlights automatically. Refer to page for more information. The high beam headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment may be required. Adjustment of the high beam headlights should be performed by a dealer or other mechanic.

140

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/Daytime Running Light Bulb

372

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

CONTINUED

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover from the side you are working on by carefully pulling the cover out (see page ).

If you are replacing the bulb on the drivers side, remove the battery cover (see page ), then remove the battery hold-down by removing the two nuts with a 10 mm wrench. Then carefully slide the battery toward the engine to access the bulb.

2.

3.

1.

362

391

Lights M

aintenance

373

NUTS BULB

BATTERY HOLD-DOWN

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test the new bulb.

(Drivers side)

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the bulb in slightly, and turn it counterclockwise.

Reinstall the battery in the reverse order of removal, and reinstall the cover on the battery.

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover from the side you are working on by carefully pulling the cover out (see page ).

If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, slide the battery toward the engine to get more clearance (see page ).

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 3.

362

391

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal Bulb

374

SOCKETBULB

Install the new bulb into the socket.

Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

(Drivers side)

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of its socket.

Remove the left or right side engine compartment cover (see page ).

(Passengers side) Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the holding clip from the windshield washer reservoir.

If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, slide the battery toward the engine to get more clearance (see page ).

Reinstall the battery and the battery cover.

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

1.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 3.

4.

362

391

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing a Front Position/Side Marker Light Bulb

M aintenance

375

BULB

HOLDING CLIP

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two mounting bolts and remove the holding clip with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Carefully push up the side under cover into the bumper.

Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Install the new bulb into the socket.

Insert the socket back into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

(Drivers side) Reinstall the battery and the battery cover.

Reinstall the windshield washer reservoir.

(Passengers side)

Reinstall the engine compartment side cover.

1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

376

BOLTS

CLIPHalogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.

Reinstall the two mounting bolts on the side under cover and tighten them securely. Put the holding clip back on the side under cover and push on the center until it locks (the center is flush with the head).

3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

Lights M

aintenance

377

BULB

Determine which of the two bulbs is burned out: turn signal or back- up light.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb by pulling it straight out of its socket.

Open the trunk lid, and remove the left or right maintenance lid.

Remove the mounting nut with an 8 mm wrench.

Carefully pry in the top or bottom edge of the trim with a small flat- tipped screwdriver, and pull the trim straight back.

Remove the two mounting bolts with an 8 mm wrench.

Pull the taillight assembly straight back out of the body.

2.

1. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

378

MOUNTING NUT

MAINTENANCE LID

BOLTS

BULBS

TAIL LIGHT TRIM

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the insides of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Tighten the mounting nut securely, and reinstall the maintenance lid.

When reinstalling the taillight assembly, align and pop the snap fasteners in place. Tighten the two mounting bolts and reinstall the trim in place.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts M

aintenance

379

LOOP

Make sure the rear floor mats are properly hooked to the floor mat anchors. Your vehicle is equipped with front passengers seat weight sensors. If the rear passengers floor mat is on the seat rail of the front passengers seat, the sensors will detect the decreased weight on the seat, and they may not work properly.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat, make sure it fits properly and that it can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.

The floor mats that came with your vehicle hook over floor mat anchors. This keeps the floor mats from sliding forward/rearward and possibly interfering with the pedals or making the front passengers weight sensors ineffective.

Floor Mats

Floor Mats

380

HOOK HOOK

HOOK Front

Front Front

DRIVERS SIDE FLOOR MAT FRONT PASSENGERS SIDE FLOOR MAT

REAR PASSENGERS FLOOR MAT

Push the edge of the cover on the blade assembly until the other side of edge is pivoted out, and remove the cover.

Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by removing the two screws from the arm.

Adjust the windshield wiper arms to the winter position by holding both wiper arms as shown in the illustration at the same time (see page ). Raise the wiper arms off the windshield.

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every 6 months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

2.1.

3. 135

Wiper Blades M

aintenance

381

COVER

SCREWSWIPER ARMS

HOLDING LOCATIONS

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and the wiper arms.

Remove the blade from its holder by grasping the tabbed end of the blade. Pull firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock.

Reinstall the blade assembly to the wiper arm and tighten the two screws securely. Reinstall the cover by pushing in.

Set the wiper arms back on the windshield. Adjust the windshield wipers to their previously parked position.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

Wiper Blades

382

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

CONTINUED

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.

The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.

Check the pressure in the tires when they are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.

We recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) will warn you when a tire pressure is low. See page for information on the TPMS. Add or release air, if needed, to

match the recommended cold tire pressures on page .384

335

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

M aintenance

383

Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Cold Tire Pressure Front

Rear

Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Front:

Rear:

This chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal and high speed driving conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

For additional technical information about your tires, see page .

If you check the pressure when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold reading. This is normal; do not release air to match the cold pressure. The tires will be underinflated.

You should get your own tire pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

427

On models with the Michelin PAX system

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tire Inspection

384

T155/70D17 110M

P245/50R17 98V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

245-680R460A 102V

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.

To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the tires to the positions shown in the chart each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to- back.

Your tires have wear indicators molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

M aintenance

385

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front Front

(For Directional Tires and Wheels)

(For Non-directional Tires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling.

Wheels:Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel, make sure the wheels specifications match those of the original wheel that came on your vehicle. Replacement wheels are available at your Acura dealer.

Tires:

See page for DOT tire quality grading information, and page

for tire size explanation.430

428

On models with the Michelin PAX system

On models with the Michelin PAX system

Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheels and Tires

386

17 x 8.0J AL (TPMS)

P245/50R17 98V

245-680R460A 102V

235 x 460A (TPMS)

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all- weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.

Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, Acura strongly recommends using the chain listed below, made by Security Chain Company (SCC).

Tire chains cannot be used with a flat front tire. If a front tire goes flat when a tire chain is installed on it, remove the chain, and follow the precautions described under Michelin PAX System (see page

).

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain CH2612T

389

CONTINUED

Tires

Winter Driving Tire ChainsSnow Tires

M aintenance

387

When installing cables, follow the manufacturers instructions, and mount them as tight as you can. Make sure they are not contacting the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly with them installed. If you hear them coming into contact with the body or chassis, stop and investigate. Remove them as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

Your vehicle is not designed for Michelin PAX system wheels or tires. Use only the wheels and tires designated in this owners manual. Never mix conventional wheels or tires with PAX system wheels or tires.

Vehicles without the Michelin PAX System

Tires

388

Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

There are no snow tires compatible with the PAX system, and not all tire chains are suitable for use on the PAX system tires. To prevent tire chain damage to your PAX system tire or wheel, ensure that no part of the chain contacts the PAX system.

If you must continue driving with a flat tire, follow all the procedures and precautions described on page

.

Never use a tire repair agent in a PAX system tire, and never repair a PAX system tire by yourself. Repair or replacement must be done by an Acura dealer or an authorized Michelin PAX system dealer.

If you mount snow chains on you tires, use the chains recommended by Acura (see page ).

Do not replace the PAX system tires and wheels with conventional tires and wheels. Doing so would disable the PAX system and the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), and may void your new vehicle warranty.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Michelin PAX System which, together with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), enables you to continue driving even if one or more of your tires loses its pressure.

The tires and wheels on your vehicle are specially designed for the PAX system, and the PAX system is specifically designed and fine-tuned for your vehicle.

Because of these reasons, use only the wheels and tires designated in this owners manual. Never mix PAX system wheels or tires with conventional wheels or tires.

387

394

If equipped

Tires

Michelin PAX System Important Precautions

M aintenance

389

Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicators colors.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder). To remove it, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your dealer or a qualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( ) cable first, and reconnect it last.

To see the label, remove the battery cover (see page ).391

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

390

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled mechanic do the battery maintenance.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, all stored driving positions will be lost. To store the driving positions again, see the storing procedure on page .

The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

Push the tabs and remove the cover by pulling it up carefully.

To reinstall the cover, put the tabs of the cover back to the original position properly.

Turn the knob of the cover to LOCK position as showing in the illustration.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you will see in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code (see page

).

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the power tilt and telescopic steering

wheel system will be disabled. The system needs to be reset after reconnecting the battery (see page

).

Turn the knob of the battery cover to UNLOCK as shown in the illustration.

1.

2.

3.

4.

232

156 144

On vehicles with navigation system

Checking the Battery

Removing the Battery Cover

M aintenance

391

KNOB TAB

LOCK UNLOCK

If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.

Wash and dry the exterior completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in Park.

Vehicle Storage

392

This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.

...............Driving with a Flat Tire . 394 ......................Compact Spare Tire . 397 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 398

.............If the Engine Wont Start . 402 ................................Jump Starting . 403

..............If the Engine Overheats . 406 .........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409 ..........Charging System Indicator . 409

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410 ...............Brake System Indicator . 411

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ....................................Manually . 412

..............................................Fuses . 413 ..............................Fuse Locations . 418

......................Emergency Towing . 421 ..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 421

Taking Care of the Unexpected T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

393

Your vehicle is equipped with the Michelin PAX system. Since each Michelin PAX system tire has an inner support ring that allows it to continue running without air, it may be difficult to immediately judge from its appearance if a tire is punctured. Your vehicle is also equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS), and this system may be your first detection of a flat tire.

If the indicator and the message come on again, you probably have a flat tire. In this case, you will see a PAX SYSTEM WARNING message on the multi-information display.

The TPMS monitors the air pressure of all four tires whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. It will immediately sense if a tire starts to lose its pressure, and give you warning with the low tire pressure indicator in the instrument panel and a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi-information display. If the indicator and the warning message do not come on again after you inflate the tire to its correct air pressure (see page ),

it was probably a natural loss of the air pressure and you can continue driving as before.

384

If equipped

Driving With a Flat Tire

Michelin PAX System

394

If you get a flat tire, never try to repair it yourself, and never replace a flat tire with a compact spare tire.

With the PAX system tires, you can drive up to about 125 miles (200 km) even if one or more of your tires are punctured. This allows you to drive to the nearest Acura dealer or authorized Michelin PAX system dealer to have the tire(s) repaired.

The above message shows that you are driving your vehicle on a flat tire, and should observe the RUN FLAT DRIVING speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h). Drive to your nearest Acura dealer or authorized Michelin PAX system dealer, or call the PAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE (1-877-729-8473).

If the display changes to the above message, it means that RUN FLAT DRIVING is nearing the limit, and you have to stop driving soon. Take your vehicle to the nearest Acura dealer or authorized Michelin PAX system dealer as soon as possible.

Follow the instructions shown on the multi-information display, and drive very carefully.

CONTINUED

Driving With a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

395

If you see the above message on the multi-information display, you have reached the limit of run flat driving, and you should stop driving immediately. Be aware that if you continue to drive, the noise and vibration level from the tire will increase significantly, and the tire may no longer be repairable.

Stop driving immediately when you see a RUN FLAT LIMIT STOP DRIVING message on the multi-information display. Continuous driving after this message will make it impossible to repair the tire.

Call a professional towing service who can transport your vehicle on flat-bed equipment. Never tow your

vehicle behind another vehicle with a rope or chain. Flat-bed equipment is the only way to transport your vehicle.

Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive carefully. Your vehicle may handle differently from when the tires are properly inflated, especially when cornering.

In its run flat mode, a PAX system tire is somewhat noisier than when it is fully inflated, this is normal.

Although your vehicle is capable of run flat driving, you should always observe the following: If you cannot find an Acura dealer or

an authorized Michelin PAX system dealer where you are driving, call the PAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE (1-877-729-8473).

Driving With a Flat Tire

Important Safety Precautions

396

Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road sur- faces. Use greater caution while driving.

Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.

Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (see page ). Driving with the compact spare tire may activate the VSA system.

Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.

340

Compact Spare Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

397

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park. Apply the parking brake. Take the tool case out of the spare

tire. Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.

Open the trunk, and fold the trunk floor forward.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then take the spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving, stop in a safe place to change it. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an exit or an area to stop that is far away from the traffic lanes.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Models without Michelin PAX System

Changing a Flat Tire

398

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

TOOL CASE JACK

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.

Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Temporarily place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface of the wheel facing up. You could scratch the wheel if you put it face down.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. It is pointed to by a mark molded into the underside of the body. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.

9.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

399

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.

Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten them fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.

10. 11. 12.

Changing a Flat Tire

400

BRAKE HUB

Store the jack and tools in the tool case. Place the tool case in the flat tire.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

Wrap the spacer cone and spare tire wing bolt with cloth or paper, and store them in the spare tire well.

14.13.

15.

16.

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

401

SPACER CONE

WING BOLT

94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engines starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound or series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position. If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connections (see page ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page ).

Diagnosing why the engine wont start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position:

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock. The transmission must be in Park or neutral or the starter will not operate.

Make sure the remote is with you, inside the vehicle.

390

421

403

403

Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Wont Start

402

In this case, the starter motors speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See

on page .

Are you using a properly coded built-in key or remote? An improperly coded built-in key or remote will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page

).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the low fuel indicator may not be working.

Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.

You cannot start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it.

311

64

415

421

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting the Engine

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Wont Start, Jump Starting T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

403

A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or frozen, do not try jump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces- sories: heater, A/C, climate control, stereo system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake.

Remove the battery cover (see page ), then remove the secondary under-hood fuse box cover from the positive ( ) terminal on the battery.

Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ) terminal on your vehicles battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.

1.

2.

3.

4.

391

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

404

COVER

BOOSTER BATTERY

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.

Start your vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery.

Reinstall the secondary under- hood fuse box cover over the positive ( ) terminal of the battery, then reinstall the battery cover.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the grounding point as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.

7.

5.

6.

8.

9.

Jump Starting T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

405

Connecting the jumper cable to the secondary under-hood f use box causes the f uses blown.

The pointer of the vehicles temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running, and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

421 Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

406

Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.

If you do not find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the tempera- ture gauge, or lower, before check- ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.

Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and watch the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

Start the engine, and set the interior temperature to maximum (climate control to FULL AUTO at ). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

421 Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

407

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

You can still drive your vehicle even if this message appears on the multi- information display, however you should check the temperature gauge while driving.

If there is a problem with the radiator system, you will see a CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If you notice the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark, Safely pull to the side of the road. Follow the instructions on pages

and .

If you see this message, the engine has probably overheated. You should take your vehicle to a dealer, and have it repaired as soon as possible.

78

406 407

Check Radiator System

If the Engine Overheats

408

Safely pull off the road, and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see on page

).

This indicator should never come on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stays on, or if you see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi- information display, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.

If the charging system indicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, or if you see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, the battery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.

Go to a dealer or a service station where you can get technical assistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

363

301

421

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

409

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for a state emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to

for more information (see page ).

Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes on while driving, or if you see a CHECK EMISSION

SYSTEM message in the multi- information display, it means one of the engines emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicles performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may go off as you continue driving, have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicles battery has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes are erased. It can take several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. You will also see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi-information display. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once (see page ). Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.

298

435

State Emissions Testing

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

410

If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicles emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicles warranties.

However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the systems dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired as soon as possible (see

on page ).

If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.

If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. You will see a BRAKE FLUID LOW message on the multi-information display. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page

).

The brake system indicator normally comes on when

you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and as a reminder to check the parking brake. If you do not release the parking brake, the indicator will stay on, and you will see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi- information display.

369

421 Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

411

U.S. Canada

If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.

If the fuel fill door release button does not work, use the release lever inside the left maintenance lid in the trunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

412

LID RELEASE LEVER

To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, pull it toward you, and take it out of its hinges.

The fuses are located in five fuse boxes. The interior fuse boxes are located under the dashboard on the drivers and passengers side.

To open the secondary fuse box lid, push the tab in the direction shown in the illustration.

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

413

FUSE BOX TAB

INTERIOR FUSE BOXINTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers sidePassengers side

NOTCH NOTCH

The primary under-hood fuse box is in the engine compartment on the drivers side. To open it, push the tabs as shown.

The secondary under-hood fuse box is on the battery. To open it, push the tabs as shown.

To check the fuse box, remove the battery cover first (see page ).391

Fuses

414

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

TAB

TAB

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off. Remove the cover from the fuse box.

If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages

, , and , or the diagram on the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses control that device. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is the cause. Replace any blown fuses, and check if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking through the top at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is inside the primary under-hood fuse box.

3. 4.1.

2.

418 419 420

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

415

FUSE

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits with the fuse puller provided in the under- hood fuse box. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket or radio). If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate anything wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified mechanic.

Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.

6.

5.

Fuses

416

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.

If the fuse for the driving position memory system is removed, all stored driving positions will be lost. To store the driving positions again, see page .

If the radio fuse is removed, the audio system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio you will see in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code (see page

).

If the fuse for the power tilt telescopic steering is removed, the system will be disabled. The system needs to be reset after reinstalling the fuse (see page ).

If the navigation system fuse is removed, the navigation system will disable itself. The next time you turn on the ignition switch, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

156

232

143

On vehicles with navigation system

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

417

No. Amps. Amps.

No. Amps.

No.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14

15 A 30 A 10 A 15 A 10 A 15 A

7.5 A 15 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 7.5 A 15 A 40 A

40 A 15 A 30 A 40 A 40 A

40 A 70 A

120 A 50 A 50 A

1 50 A

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23

Radiator fan

Left headlight low beam Rear defroster coil Left headlight high beam Small light Right headlight high beam Right headlight low beam Back-up FI ECU Wiper Headlight washer Fog lights MG clutch Horn, Stop Rear defroster

Back-up, ACC Hazard VSA motor VSA Drive by wire, Laf heater Not used (OP) Heater motor Passengers fuse box Battery IG main Power window

: On Canadian models

Fuse Locations

418

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedAmps.Amps.

Amps.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

1 2

Starter diag. Starter signal

Drive by Wire Ignition coil Daytime running light Laf heater Radio Interior light Back-up Door lock Accessory socket Occupant position detection system Wiper

Drivers power seat sliding Power lumbar support Drivers power seat reclining

ACG Fuel Pump IGN SOL Meter SRS IGP (PGM-FI ECU) Left rear power window ETS (telescopic) ETS (tilt) Drivers power window Moonroof AFS A/C SH-AWD ACC Option

20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A

(7.5 A)

15 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 7.5 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 10 A 20 A

7.5 A 7.5 A

Tire pressure monitoring system Passengers power seat reclining

Passengers power seat sliding

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

419

INTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX Drivers side

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 1 2 3 4

5

30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A

20 A

SH-AWD Premium amplifier Passengers power window Drivers automatic seat belt tensioner/e-pretensioner Right rear power window

6 7

8

9

20 A 7.5 A

30 A

7.5 A

Heated seats Interior lights Passengers automatic seat belt tensioner/ e-pretensioner Air conditioner

Fuse Locations

420

INTERIOR FUSE BOX Passengers side

To use the towing hook: Remove the cover from the front bumper by pushing the right corner edge of the cover with a finger until the cover comes out as shown in the illustration.

The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow, call a towing service to pull it out (see the previous column).

For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.

1.

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

The only way you can safely tow your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment.

Emergency Towing If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

421

Push

COVER

Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.

Remove the towing hook and wheel nut wrench from the tool case in the spare tire.

The cover is attached to the bumper with a tether.

2.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

422

WHEEL NUT WRENCHCOVER

TETHER

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook f or straight, f lat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle, and the location of identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicles tires and emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 424 ................................Specifications . 426

DOT Tire Quality Grading ......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 428

.................................Treadwear . 428 ......................................Traction . 428

.............................Temperature . 429 .................................Tire Labeling . 430

.......................Emissions Controls . 432 .....................The Clean Air Act . 432

Crankcase Emissions Control ....................................System . 432

Evaporative Emissions Control ....................................System . 432

Onboard Refueling Vapor ................................Recovery . 432

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 433 ....................PGM-FI System . 433

Ignition Timing Control ................................System . 433

Exhaust Gas Recirculation ...................(EGR) System . 433

Three Way Catalytic ...........................Converter . 433

....................Replacement Parts . 433 ..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 434

..............State Emissions Testing . 435

Technical Information T echnicalInform

ation

423

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the drivers side. It is also on the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

424

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

U.S. vehicle is shown.

The engine number is stamped into the engine block. It is on the front left, below the valve cover.

The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers T echnicalInform

ation

425

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Specifications

426

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

193.6 in (4,917 mm) 72.7 in (1,847 mm) 57.1 in (1,451 mm) 110.2 in (2,800 mm) 62.0 in (1,576 mm) 62.4 in (1,585 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a) 15.8 17.60 oz (450 500 g)

ND-OIL8

1.59 US gal (6.0 ) 2.27 US gal (8.6 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 ) 2.9 US qt (2.7 ) 7.6 US qt (7.2 )

Length Width Height Wheelbase Track

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type

See the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

0.79 US qt (0.75 ) 0.77 US qt (0.73 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity:

6.9 US qt (6.5 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 ) 0.48 US qt (0.45 )

3.3 US qt (3.1 )

Fuel tank

Engine coolant Engine oil

Automatic transmission fluid Rear differential fluid

SH-AWD differential case SH-AWD clutch case

Transfer assembly fluid Windshield washer reservoir

1 :

2 :

Approx.

Front Rear

Change Total Change

Including filter Without filter

Total Change Total

Change Total

Change Total Change Total

U.S. vehicles Canadian vehicles

19.4 US gal (73 )

0.16 US gal (0.58 )

2.8 US qt (2.7 )

1

2

Specifications T echnicalInform

ation

427

Battery

Fuses

EngineLights

Alignment

Tires

12 V 12 V

60 W 24/2.2 CP

12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V

3 CP 21 W 21 W 55 W 5 W 8 W 8 W 2 W 2 CP 5 W

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

12 V 12 V

55 AH/5 HR 72 AH/20 HR

Type Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

Spark plug gap

3.54 x 3.58 in (89 x 93 mm) 212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

11.0 : 1 IZFR6K11 SKJ20DR-M11

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

0.00 in (0.0 mm) 0.08 in (2.0 mm)

08 115

210

P245/50R17 98V

SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engineHeadlights (High Beam) Front turn signal Front side marker Rear turn signal lights Back-up light Fog lights License plate lights Ceiling lights

Vanity mirror lights Door courtesy lights Trunk light

Toe-in

Camber

CasterLow beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube (D2S).

Size

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/70D17 110M 245-680R460A 102V

See page 419 and 420 or the fuse label attached to the inside of each fuse box cover. See page 418 or the fuse box cover.

Front Rear Front Rear Front

Front Rear

NGK: DENSO:

(Amber)

:

(Amber)

: Michelin PAX system model

Front/Rear

Spare Front Rear Spare

0 0.1 mm

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and the maximum section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

428

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance that all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

T echnicalInform

ation

429

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width).

Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturers identification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. The maximum air

pressure the tire can hold.

The maximum load the tire can carry at maximum air pressure.

Max Press

Max Load

P

R

V

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

245

50

17

98

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

430

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P245/50R17 98V

Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

The PAX system tires have different markings from conventional tire markings. Following is an example of PAX system tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

Symmetric

Nominal diameter at the rim seat in millimeters.

Tire construction code (R indicates radial)

Outside diameter of the tire in millimeters.

Tire width in millimeters.

A

R

460

102

V

680

245

U.S. model only

Tire Labeling (PAX System Tires)

PAX System Tire Labeling

T echnicalInform

ation

431

245-680R460A 102V

The burning of gasoline in your vehicles engine produces several by- products. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Con- trolling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environ- ment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog. Carbon monoxide does not contri- bute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian emission requirements, as specified in an agreement with Environment Canada, at the time they are manufactured.

Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engines crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the intake manifold. They are then drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.

The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work. Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .357 358

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions Control System

Evaporative Emissions Control System

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery

Emissions Controls

432

The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engines combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequential multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.

The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more informa- tion.The three way catalytic converters

are in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, they convert HC, CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls T echnicalInform

ation

433

The three way catalytic converters contain precious metals that serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converters are referred to as three-way catalysts, since they act on HC, CO, and NOx. Replacement units must be original Acura parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic converters must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. They can set on fire any combustible materials that come near them. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engines per- formance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicles three way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converters ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Three Way Catalytic Converters

434

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

If you take your vehicle for a state emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.

Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95F.

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing T echnicalInform

ation

435

Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing

436

Customer Service ................................Information . 438

....................Warranty Coverages . 439 Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 440 .....................Authorized Manuals . 441

Warranty and Customer Relations W

arranty and

C ustom

er R

elations

437

If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealerships management, contact the Acura Client Services Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:

When you call or write, please give us this information:

Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealerships management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.

Vehicle identification number (see page ) Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle Date of purchase Mileage on your vehicle Your name, address, and tele- phone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

424

Customer Service Information

438

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTLE

Honda Canada Inc. 715 Milner Avenue Toronto, ON M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7028

covers your new vehicle, except for the battery, emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

this warranty gives up to 100 percent credit toward a replacement battery.

a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered for the useful life of the vehicle.

all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.

covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

provides coverage for as long as the pur- chaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2006 Acura Warranty Information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 Warranty Manual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty

W arranty

and C

ustom er

R elations

439

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Acura Automobile Division, American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

440

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian owners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

A uthorized

M anuals

441

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2005-2006 Acura RL

Service Manual

2005-2006 Acura RL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2005-2006 Acura RL

Body Repair Manual

2006 Acura RL Owners Manual

2006 Acura RL

Navigation System Manual

2006 Acura RL

Maintenance Journal

2006 Acura RL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SJA01

61SJA01EL

61SJA30

31SJA610

31SJA710

31SJAM10

31SJAQ10

ACU-R

Price

Each

$80.00

$50.00

$44.00

$42.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODEL

Name Year Qty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please allow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under- stand.

This manual complements the service manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

442

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown below for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280DETROIT, MICHIGAN 482071-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only. Do not send cash

Master Card

VISA Check here if your billing address is different from the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14 days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 303 ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 147 ............Accessory Power Sockets . 188

......................................AcuraLink . 256 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

.....................................Indicator . 237 ...................................Operation . 239

Adaptive Front Lighting System ..........................................(AFS) . 139

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 363 .............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 27

............................Air Conditioning . 194 .......................Air Pressure, Tires . 384 .......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 296

......................................Antifreeze . 366 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 64, 324 ...................................Operation . 323

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 232 Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 147 .........................................Ashtrays . 189

................................Audio System . 203

Auto Control Mode, Starting ........................................Engine . 311

..........Automatic Climate Control . 201 .......................Automatic Lighting . 137

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22 .............Automatic Speed Control . 234 ..............Automatic Transmission . 313

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 426 ...............Checking Fluid Level . 368

.......................................Shifting . 313 Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 313 ................Shift Lever Positions . 313

....................Shift Lock Release . 318

Battery Charging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 409 ............................Jump Starting . 403

..............................Maintenance . 390 ..........................................Cover . 391

............................Specifications . 427 ..............................Before Driving . 295

..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21

.........................Beverage Holders . 186 ..................................Booster Seats . 53

Brakes Anti-lock Brake

........................System (ABS) . 323 .............Break-in, New Linings . 296

...........................................Fluid . 369 .......................................Parking . 183

.................System Indicator . 63, 411 ........................Wear Indicators . 322

.............................Braking System . 322 .................Break-in, New Vehicle . 296

Brightness Control, ...............................Instruments . 141

......................Brights, Headlights . 136 Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 378 .......................Front Fog Lights . 376

...............Front Position Lights . 375 ........Front Side Marker Lights . 375

.................................Headlights . 372 ............................Specifications . 427

............Turn Signal Lights . 374, 375 .....................................Built-in-key . 160

Index

A

B

IN D

E X

I

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 372

............................Capacities Chart . 426 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 305 ..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 228 .......................CD Error Message . 229

...................................CD Changer . 219 ................................Ceiling Lights . 192

........................Certification Label . 424 .................................Chains, Tires . 387

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 398 Changing Oil

........................................How to . 364 ......................................When to . 349

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 409 ............Checklist, Before Driving . 310

.....................................Child Safety . 38 ..............................Booster Seats . 53

...................................Child Seats . 45 Important Safety

...............................Reminders . 38 ..........................................Infants . 42

..........................Larger Children . 52 .........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 39 .............................Small Children . 44

.........................................Tethers . 51 .........Where Should a Child Sit? . 39

.......................................Child Seats . 44 .........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ................Childproof Door Locks . 150

Cleaning ...................................Seat Belts . 379

...............Climate Control System . 194 ........................CO in the Exhaust . 432

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 311 Collision Mitigation Brake System

(CMBS) .....................................Indicator . 329 ...................................Operation . 325

......................Compact Spare Tire . 397 .................Console Compartment . 187 .................Consumer Information . 438

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59 Coolant

........................................Adding . 366 ....................................Checking . 301

.........................Proper Solution . 366 ...................Temperature Gauge . 70

Crankcase Emissions Control ........................................System . 432

................Cruise Control Indicator . 66 ............Cruise Control Operation . 234

...................................Cup Holders . 186 .............Customer Service Office . 438

.........................Customize Settings . 81 ................Door/Window Setup . 119

.......KEYLESS ACCESS Setup . 105 ...........................Lighting Setup . 112

.................................Meter Setup . 91 ...........................Position Setup . 100

........................Setting to Default . 82 ...............................Wiper Setup . 130

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii ...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 138 .......................................Indicator . 66

.................................Dead Battery . 403 ............Defects, Reporting Safety . 440

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 142

Index

D

C

II

CONTINUED

..............Defrosting the Windows . 200 ..........................Differential Fluid . 426

....................................Dimensions . 426 .............Dimming the Headlights . 136

Dipstick ..........Automatic Transmission . 368

..................................Engine Oil . 301 ........................Directional Signals . 136

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 322 .....................Disposal of Used Oil . 365

Doors ............Locking and Unlocking . 148

..................Lockout Prevention . 148 .................Monitor Indicator . 13, 79 ....................Power Door Locks . 148

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428 ...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

.......................................Drivers ID . 81 ...........................................Driving . 309

....................................Economy . 302 Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 156

..............................Economy, Fuel . 302

..................................Emergencies . 393 .............Battery, Jump Starting . 403 ...........Brake System Indicator . 411

................Changing a Flat Tire . 398 .....Charging System Indicator . 409

..................Checking the Fuses . 415 .......Hazard Warning Flashers . 141

............................Jump Starting . 403 .....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409 ...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ................................Manually . 412

..................Overheated Engine . 406 .......................................Towing . 421

.........................Emergency Brake . 183 ....................Emergency Flashers . 141

......................Emergency Towing . 421 ..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

.......................Emissions Controls . 432 .............Emissions Testing, State . 435

Engine ............Check Starting System . 312

...............Compartment Covers . 362 ....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70

.........................If It Wont Start . 402

Malfunction Indicator ................................Lamp . 62, 410

.........................................Oil life . 349 ........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 409 ..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 363

...............................Overheating . 406 ............................Specifications . 427 ............................Speed Limiter . 318

.......................................Starting . 311 ...................Engine Speed Limiter . 318

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 296 .Evaporative Emissions Controls . 432

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56 Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 433 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19

...................................Fan, Interior . 196 .........................................Features . 193

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 297

Index

E

F

IN D

E X

III

................Gas Mileage Improving . 302 .........................................Gasoline . 296 ...........................................Gauge . 70

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66 ................Octane Requirement . 296

........................Tank, Refueling . 297 ................Gas Station Procedures . 297

.............................................Gauges . 70 ...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70

...............................................Fuel . 70 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 342 ............Gearshift Lever Positions . 313

......................................Glove Box . 185 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 342

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 372

..........................HandsFreeLink . 278 ............Hazard Warning Flashers . 141

Headlights Adaptive Front Lighting System

......................................(AFS) . 139 ........................................Aiming . 372

..................Automatic Lighting . 137 .........Daytime Running Lights . 138

..................High Beam Indicator . 66 ....................Lights On Indicator . 64

..........Low Beams, Turning on . 136 .......................Reminder Chime . 136

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 372 ..........High beams, Turning on . 136

...................................Washer . 134 ............................Head Restraints . 152

...............................Heated Mirror . 155 ...................................Heater, Seat . 174

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 311 HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 252 .......................Hood, Opening the . 299

................................................Horn . 133

Filters ...............................................Oil . 364

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 141 ...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 398

.....................................Floor Mats . 380 Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 368 ..........................................Brake . 369

..........................Power Steering . 370 ..................Windshield Washer . 368

.....................................Fog Lights . 138 ........................Four-way Flashers . 141

............................Front Airbags . 11, 29 ......................................Front Seat . 151 ....................................Adjusting . 151

.......................................Heaters . 174

...................................Airbags . 11, 29 ...........................Air Ventilation . 175

.................................................Fuel . 296 ......................Fill Door and Cap . 297

...........................................Gauge . 70 .....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

................Octane Requirement . 296 Opening the Fuel Fill Door

................................Manually . 412 ...............................Oxygenated . 296

........................Tank, Refueling . 297 ......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 298 .....................Fuses, Checking the . 415

Index

G

H

IV

TM

CONTINUED

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 399 .......................................Jack, Tire . 398

................................Jump Starting . 403

................................................Keys . 145 ................Keyless Access System . 159 ...............Keyless Access Remote . 160

...........Keyless Memory Settings . 166

.......................Label, Certification . 424 ...............Lane Change, Signaling . 136

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 21

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 424 Ignition

............................................Keys . 145 .........................................Switch . 147

............Timing Control System . 433 ......................Immobilizer System . 146

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8 .........................................Indicators . 62

ABS (Anti-lock Brake ............................System) . 64, 323

Aduptive Front lighting ..................System (AFS) . 69, 139

Brake (Parking and Brake ............................System) . 63, 322

................Charging System . 62, 409 Collision Mitigation Brake

..............System (CMBS) . 69, 325 .............................Cruise Control . 66

DRL (Daytime Running ......................................Lights) . 66

Electronically Controlled Power ..........Steering System (EPS) . 68

.....................................Fog Light . 66 ...................................High Beam . 66

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64 .....Keyless Access System . 68, 172

.....................................Lights On . 64 ......................................Low Fuel . 66

................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 409 Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 67, 335 .............Malfunction (MIL) . 62, 410

.......................................Message . 68 ..............Seat Belt Reminder . 21, 62

..................Security System . 69, 233 ......................................SH-AWD . 67

...........................Side Airbag Off . 63 ...............................................SRS . 63

Turn Signal and Hazard ...................................Warning . 65

..VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) . 65 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

.........................Activation . 65, 339 .........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 42 ......................................Infant Seats . 42

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51 ...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 383

.................................Inside Mirror . 154 .............................Inspection, Tire . 384

............................Instrument Panel . 61 ......Instrument Panel Brightness . 141

................Interface Dial . 195, 203, 256 ...............................Interior Lights . 192

........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

I

IN D

E X

V

........................Lights On Indicator . 64 Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 372 .......................................Indicator . 61

......................................Position . 136 ................................Turn Signal . 136

.....................................Load Limit . 341 ....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 147

Locks .....Anti-theft Steering Column . 147

........................Childproof Door . 150 ............................Fuel Fill Door . 297

..................................Glove Box . 185 ...............................Power Door . 148

.........................................Trunk . 149 ......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 153

........................Low Coolant Level . 301 .........................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 409 ...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 426

..........................Luggage, Storing . 305

..................................Maintenance . 347 ................................Main Items . 357

........................................Minder . 349 Owners Maintenance

...................................Checks . 356 .................................Record . 359-360

..........................................Safety . 348 .............................Schedule . 349-358 ...................................Sub Items . 358

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 410 ...........Memory, Driving Position . 156

.............................Message Display . 78 ..........................Message Indicator . 68

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70 ...................Methanol in Gasoline . 296

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 154 .................................Modifications . 303

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 304 ................................Moonroof . 179-182

................................................MP3 . 225 .............Multi-Information Display . 71

...................Neutral Gear Position . 314 ..................New Vehicle Break-in . 296

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i ...............Numbers, Identification . 424

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 296 .........................................Odometer . 72

...............................Odometer, Trip . 72 Oil

........................Change, How to . 364 ......................Change, When to . 349 ......................Checking Engine . 301

...............................Life, Engine . 349 ..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 409

Selecting Proper Viscosity ......................................Chart . 363

.....ON (Ignition Switch Position) . 147 Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 432 ............................................OnStar . 265

............................Outside Mirrors . 155 ....Outside Temperature Indicator . 73

....................Overheating, Engine . 406 ....Owners Maintenance Checks . 356

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 296

..............................Paddle Shifters . 315

Index

O

P M

N

VI

CONTINUED

............Panel Brightness Control . 141 ........................Park Gear Position . 314

...........................................Parking . 314 ...............................Parking Brake . 183

Parking Brake and Brake .................System Indicator . 63, 411

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 434 ...................................PAX System . 389

.............................PGM-FI System . 433 ........................Power Door Locks . 148

...............Power Socket Locations . 188 ............................Power Windows . 177

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19 ........................Protecting Children . 38 .......................Protecting Infants . 42

.......Protecting Larger Children . 52 .........Protecting Small Children . 44

Using Child Seats with .....................................Tethers . 51

.............................Using LATCH . 47

...................Radiator Overheating . 406 .............Radio/CD Sound System . 203

...........................Readiness Codes . 410 ..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 378

..........................Rear View Mirror . 154 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 142 .............Reclining the Seat Backs . 151

.......................Reminder Indicators . 62 ...........................................Remote . 160

Replacement Information ................Engine Oil and Filter . 364

..........................................Fuses . 413 ................................Light Bulbs . 372

....................................Schedule . 349 ...........................................Tires . 383

.............................Wiper Blades . 381 Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 25 ...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 301

...............................Restraint, Child . 38 ..................Reverse Gear Position . 314

......................................Roof Rack . 307 ................................Rotation, Tire . 385

................................Safety Belts . 10, 21 .........Safety Defects, Reporting . 440

.................................Safety Features . 9 .........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10 .............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

...............................Safety Messages . ii .................Satellite Digital Radio . 213

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 21 ...............Additional Information . 21

.Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . 22 .....................................Cleaning . 379

.............................E-pretensioner . 23 ................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 21

................................Maintenance . 25 Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 21, 62 ...................System Components . 21

...............Use During Pregnancy . 19 ..................................Seat Heaters . 174

..................Seat Position Memory . 156 .........................Seat Ventilation . 175

Index IN

D E

X

R S

VII

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 151 ............................Security System . 233

.....Sequential Sports Shift Mode . 315 ..........................Paddle Shifters . 315

...............................Serial Number . 424 ...........................Service Intervals . 349

......Service Manual, Purchasing . 441 .........Service Station Procedures . 297

........................................SH-AWD . 320 ..Torque Distribution Monitor . 320

.......................................Indicator . 67 ...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 313

........................Shift Lock Release . 318 ..............................Side Airbags . 11, 32

How the Side Airbag off ......................Indicator Works . 35

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32 ................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 34

How Your Side Curtain ..........................Airbags Work . 34

Side Marker Lights, Bulb .........................Replacement in . 375

.............................Signaling Turns . 136 .....................................Snow Tires . 387

................................Sound System . 203

Spare Tire ......................................Inflating . 397

............................Specifications . 427 ....................Specifications Charts . 426

................................Speed Limiter . 318 .......................................Spotlights . 192

..........SRS, Additional Information . 26 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 37 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How Your Airbags ............................Work . 29, 32, 34

........................SRS Components . 26 ..................................SRS Service . 36

.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 63 START (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 147 .......................Starting the Engine . 311

...................Auto Control Mode . 311 In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 311 ................With a Dead Battery . 403 ..............State Emissions Testing . 435

........Steam Coming from Engine . 406 Steering Wheel

..............................Adjustments . 143 ...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 147

......................Position Memory . 156 Steering Wheel Buttons/

.....................................Switches . 230 ...................Stereo Sound System . 203 ....................Storing Your Vehicle . 392

......................................Sun Visors . 188 Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 11, 26

......................................Servicing . 36 .........................SRS Indicator . 34, 63

...................System Components . 26 ..................................Synthetic Oil . 363

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 393 Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428 .....Emissions Control Systems . 432

Three Way Catalytic .............................Converters . 434

.......................Temperature Gauge . 70 ........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 202

....................Temperature, Outside . 73 ..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

Index

T

VIII

CONTINUED

Unexpected, Taking Care ..........................................of the . 393

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 428 ........................Unleaded Gasoline . 296

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 365

Three Way Catalytic .................................Converters . 434

Tilt/Telescopic Steering .........................................Wheel . 143

....................................Timing Belt . 371

....................................Tire Chains . 387 .........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 398

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..................................(TPMS) . 335

Monitoring Tire Pressure ..................................Reading . 387

...........TPMS System Warning . 335 ...............................................Tires . 383

..............................Air Pressure . 384 ........................................Chains . 387

.........................Checking Wear . 384 ..........................Compact Spare . 397

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428 ......................................Inflation . 383

..................................Inspection . 384 ..............Michelin PAX System . 394

...................................Replacing . 386 ......................................Rotating . 385

...........................................Snow . 387 ............................Specifications . 427

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 398

Torque Distribution Monitor .................................(SH-AWD) . 320

Towing .....................................A Trailer . 341

....Equipment and Accessories . 342 .............................Weight Limit . 341

.............................................TPMS . 335 .............................Trailer Loading . 341

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 345 Transmission

Checking Fluid Level, ..............................Automatic . 368

...........................Fluid Selection . 369 ..............Identification Number . 424 .............Shifting the Automatic . 313

.....................................Treadwear . 397

.......................................Trip Meter . 72 ..............................................Trunk . 149

..................Emergency Opener . 150 ...............................Opening the . 149

.......Open Monitor Indicator . 13, 79 ..................................Turn Signals . 136

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 306 ......................Vehicle Dimensions . 426

....Vehicle Identification Number . 424 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 339 ...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 339

.........................VSA Off Switch . 340 ........VSA System Indicator . 65, 339

.............................Vehicle Storage . 392 .................................................VIN . 424

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 363

Index IN

D E

X

V

U

IX

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii .........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

....................Warranty Coverages . 439 Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 368 ...................................Operation . 134

Wheels .............Adjusting the Steering . 143 ............Alignment and Balance . 385

..........................Compact Spare . 397 ...............................Nut Wrench . 399

Windows .............................Auto Reverse . 178

................Operating the Power . 177 .........................Rear, Defogger . 142

Windshield .....................................Cleaning . 134 ...................................Defroster . 197

.....................................Washers . 134 Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 381 ...................................Operation . 134

........Summer/Winter Position . 135 ..............................................WMA . 225

....................................Worn Tires . 384 .....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 421

......................XM Satellite Radio . 213

: :

U.S. only Canada only

Index

X

W

X

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure: 4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (including filter):

Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20 detergent oil (see page ).

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only.

SH-AWD clutch case

Capacity: SH-AWD differential case

0.77 US qt (0.73 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) preferred, or a DEXRON III ATF as a temporary replacement.

Honda Power Steering Fluid preferred, or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Do not use ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ).

Front: 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) preferred, or a DEXRON III ATF as a temporary replacement (see page

).

19.4 US gal (73

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the RL Acura works, you can view and download the Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Acura RL as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura RL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura RL 2006 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.